]> code.delx.au - gnu-emacs/blob - doc/lispref/display.texi
Clarify documentation of 'line-spacing' and 'line-height'
[gnu-emacs] / doc / lispref / display.texi
1 @c -*- mode: texinfo; coding: utf-8 -*-
2 @c This is part of the GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual.
3 @c Copyright (C) 1990-1995, 1998-2016 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
4 @c See the file elisp.texi for copying conditions.
5 @node Display
6 @chapter Emacs Display
7
8 This chapter describes a number of features related to the display
9 that Emacs presents to the user.
10
11 @menu
12 * Refresh Screen:: Clearing the screen and redrawing everything on it.
13 * Forcing Redisplay:: Forcing redisplay.
14 * Truncation:: Folding or wrapping long text lines.
15 * The Echo Area:: Displaying messages at the bottom of the screen.
16 * Warnings:: Displaying warning messages for the user.
17 * Invisible Text:: Hiding part of the buffer text.
18 * Selective Display:: Hiding part of the buffer text (the old way).
19 * Temporary Displays:: Displays that go away automatically.
20 * Overlays:: Use overlays to highlight parts of the buffer.
21 * Size of Displayed Text:: How large displayed text is.
22 * Line Height:: Controlling the height of lines.
23 * Faces:: A face defines a graphics style for text characters:
24 font, colors, etc.
25 * Fringes:: Controlling window fringes.
26 * Scroll Bars:: Controlling scroll bars.
27 * Window Dividers:: Separating windows visually.
28 * Display Property:: Enabling special display features.
29 * Images:: Displaying images in Emacs buffers.
30 * Xwidgets:: Displaying native widgets in Emacs buffers.
31 * Buttons:: Adding clickable buttons to Emacs buffers.
32 * Abstract Display:: Emacs's Widget for Object Collections.
33 * Blinking:: How Emacs shows the matching open parenthesis.
34 * Character Display:: How Emacs displays individual characters.
35 * Beeping:: Audible signal to the user.
36 * Window Systems:: Which window system is being used.
37 * Tooltips:: Tooltip display in Emacs.
38 * Bidirectional Display:: Display of bidirectional scripts, such as
39 Arabic and Farsi.
40 @end menu
41
42 @node Refresh Screen
43 @section Refreshing the Screen
44 @cindex refresh the screen
45 @cindex screen refresh
46
47 The function @code{redraw-frame} clears and redisplays the entire
48 contents of a given frame (@pxref{Frames}). This is useful if the
49 screen is corrupted.
50
51 @defun redraw-frame &optional frame
52 This function clears and redisplays frame @var{frame}. If @var{frame}
53 is omitted or nil, it redraws the selected frame.
54 @end defun
55
56 Even more powerful is @code{redraw-display}:
57
58 @deffn Command redraw-display
59 This function clears and redisplays all visible frames.
60 @end deffn
61
62 In Emacs, processing user input takes priority over redisplay. If
63 you call these functions when input is available, they don't redisplay
64 immediately, but the requested redisplay does happen
65 eventually---after all the input has been processed.
66
67 On text terminals, suspending and resuming Emacs normally also
68 refreshes the screen. Some terminal emulators record separate
69 contents for display-oriented programs such as Emacs and for ordinary
70 sequential display. If you are using such a terminal, you might want
71 to inhibit the redisplay on resumption.
72
73 @defopt no-redraw-on-reenter
74 @cindex suspend (cf. @code{no-redraw-on-reenter})
75 @cindex resume (cf. @code{no-redraw-on-reenter})
76 This variable controls whether Emacs redraws the entire screen after it
77 has been suspended and resumed. Non-@code{nil} means there is no need
78 to redraw, @code{nil} means redrawing is needed. The default is @code{nil}.
79 @end defopt
80
81 @node Forcing Redisplay
82 @section Forcing Redisplay
83 @cindex forcing redisplay
84
85 Emacs normally tries to redisplay the screen whenever it waits for
86 input. With the following function, you can request an immediate
87 attempt to redisplay, in the middle of Lisp code, without actually
88 waiting for input.
89
90 @defun redisplay &optional force
91 This function tries immediately to redisplay. The optional argument
92 @var{force}, if non-@code{nil}, forces the redisplay to be performed,
93 instead of being preempted if input is pending.
94
95 The function returns @code{t} if it actually tried to redisplay, and
96 @code{nil} otherwise. A value of @code{t} does not mean that
97 redisplay proceeded to completion; it could have been preempted by
98 newly arriving input.
99 @end defun
100
101 Although @code{redisplay} tries immediately to redisplay, it does
102 not change how Emacs decides which parts of its frame(s) to redisplay.
103 By contrast, the following function adds certain windows to the
104 pending redisplay work (as if their contents had completely changed),
105 but does not immediately try to perform redisplay.
106
107 @defun force-window-update &optional object
108 This function forces some or all windows to be updated the next time
109 Emacs does a redisplay. If @var{object} is a window, that window is
110 to be updated. If @var{object} is a buffer or buffer name, all
111 windows displaying that buffer are to be updated. If @var{object} is
112 @code{nil} (or omitted), all windows are to be updated.
113
114 This function does not do a redisplay immediately; Emacs does that as
115 it waits for input, or when the function @code{redisplay} is called.
116 @end defun
117
118 @defvar pre-redisplay-function
119 A function run just before redisplay. It is called with one argument,
120 the set of windows to be redisplayed. The set can be @code{nil},
121 meaning only the selected window, or @code{t}, meaning all the
122 windows.
123 @end defvar
124
125 @defvar pre-redisplay-functions
126 This hook is run just before redisplay. It is called once in each
127 window that is about to be redisplayed, with @code{current-buffer} set
128 to the buffer displayed in that window.
129 @end defvar
130
131 @node Truncation
132 @section Truncation
133 @cindex line wrapping
134 @cindex line truncation
135 @cindex continuation lines
136 @cindex @samp{$} in display
137 @cindex @samp{\} in display
138
139 When a line of text extends beyond the right edge of a window, Emacs
140 can @dfn{continue} the line (make it wrap to the next screen
141 line), or @dfn{truncate} the line (limit it to one screen line). The
142 additional screen lines used to display a long text line are called
143 @dfn{continuation} lines. Continuation is not the same as filling;
144 continuation happens on the screen only, not in the buffer contents,
145 and it breaks a line precisely at the right margin, not at a word
146 boundary. @xref{Filling}.
147
148 On a graphical display, tiny arrow images in the window fringes
149 indicate truncated and continued lines (@pxref{Fringes}). On a text
150 terminal, a @samp{$} in the rightmost column of the window indicates
151 truncation; a @samp{\} on the rightmost column indicates a line that
152 wraps. (The display table can specify alternate characters to use
153 for this; @pxref{Display Tables}).
154
155 @defopt truncate-lines
156 If this buffer-local variable is non-@code{nil}, lines that extend
157 beyond the right edge of the window are truncated; otherwise, they are
158 continued. As a special exception, the variable
159 @code{truncate-partial-width-windows} takes precedence in
160 @dfn{partial-width} windows (i.e., windows that do not occupy the
161 entire frame width).
162 @end defopt
163
164 @defopt truncate-partial-width-windows
165 @cindex partial-width windows
166 This variable controls line truncation in @dfn{partial-width} windows.
167 A partial-width window is one that does not occupy the entire frame
168 width (@pxref{Splitting Windows}). If the value is @code{nil}, line
169 truncation is determined by the variable @code{truncate-lines} (see
170 above). If the value is an integer @var{n}, lines are truncated if
171 the partial-width window has fewer than @var{n} columns, regardless of
172 the value of @code{truncate-lines}; if the partial-width window has
173 @var{n} or more columns, line truncation is determined by
174 @code{truncate-lines}. For any other non-@code{nil} value, lines are
175 truncated in every partial-width window, regardless of the value of
176 @code{truncate-lines}.
177 @end defopt
178
179 When horizontal scrolling (@pxref{Horizontal Scrolling}) is in use in
180 a window, that forces truncation.
181
182 @defvar wrap-prefix
183 If this buffer-local variable is non-@code{nil}, it defines a
184 @dfn{wrap prefix} which Emacs displays at the start of every
185 continuation line. (If lines are truncated, @code{wrap-prefix} is
186 never used.) Its value may be a string or an image (@pxref{Other
187 Display Specs}), or a stretch of whitespace such as specified by the
188 @code{:width} or @code{:align-to} display properties (@pxref{Specified
189 Space}). The value is interpreted in the same way as a @code{display}
190 text property. @xref{Display Property}.
191
192 A wrap prefix may also be specified for regions of text, using the
193 @code{wrap-prefix} text or overlay property. This takes precedence
194 over the @code{wrap-prefix} variable. @xref{Special Properties}.
195 @end defvar
196
197 @defvar line-prefix
198 If this buffer-local variable is non-@code{nil}, it defines a
199 @dfn{line prefix} which Emacs displays at the start of every
200 non-continuation line. Its value may be a string or an image
201 (@pxref{Other Display Specs}), or a stretch of whitespace such as
202 specified by the @code{:width} or @code{:align-to} display properties
203 (@pxref{Specified Space}). The value is interpreted in the same way
204 as a @code{display} text property. @xref{Display Property}.
205
206 A line prefix may also be specified for regions of text using the
207 @code{line-prefix} text or overlay property. This takes precedence
208 over the @code{line-prefix} variable. @xref{Special Properties}.
209 @end defvar
210
211 @ignore
212 If your buffer contains only very short lines, you might find it
213 advisable to set @code{cache-long-scans} to @code{nil}.
214
215 @defvar cache-long-scans
216 If this variable is non-@code{nil} (the default), various indentation
217 and motion functions, and Emacs redisplay, cache the results of
218 scanning the buffer, and consult the cache to avoid rescanning regions
219 of the buffer unless they are modified.
220
221 Turning off the cache speeds up processing of short lines somewhat.
222
223 This variable is automatically buffer-local in every buffer.
224 @end defvar
225 @end ignore
226
227 @node The Echo Area
228 @section The Echo Area
229 @cindex error display
230 @cindex echo area
231
232 @c FIXME: Why not use @xref{Minibuffers} directly? --xfq
233 The @dfn{echo area} is used for displaying error messages
234 (@pxref{Errors}), for messages made with the @code{message} primitive,
235 and for echoing keystrokes. It is not the same as the minibuffer,
236 despite the fact that the minibuffer appears (when active) in the same
237 place on the screen as the echo area. @xref{Minibuffer,, The
238 Minibuffer, emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}.
239
240 Apart from the functions documented in this section, you can print
241 Lisp objects to the echo area by specifying @code{t} as the output
242 stream. @xref{Output Streams}.
243
244 @menu
245 * Displaying Messages:: Explicitly displaying text in the echo area.
246 * Progress:: Informing user about progress of a long operation.
247 * Logging Messages:: Echo area messages are logged for the user.
248 * Echo Area Customization:: Controlling the echo area.
249 @end menu
250
251 @node Displaying Messages
252 @subsection Displaying Messages in the Echo Area
253 @cindex display message in echo area
254
255 This section describes the standard functions for displaying
256 messages in the echo area.
257
258 @defun message format-string &rest arguments
259 This function displays a message in the echo area.
260 @var{format-string} is a format string, and @var{arguments} are the
261 objects for its format specifications, like in the @code{format-message}
262 function (@pxref{Formatting Strings}). The resulting formatted string
263 is displayed in the echo area; if it contains @code{face} text
264 properties, it is displayed with the specified faces (@pxref{Faces}).
265 The string is also added to the @file{*Messages*} buffer, but without
266 text properties (@pxref{Logging Messages}).
267
268 The @code{text-quoting-style} variable controls what quotes are
269 generated; @xref{Keys in Documentation}. A call using a format like
270 @t{"Missing `%s'"} with grave accents and apostrophes typically
271 generates a message like @t{"Missing ‘foo’"} with matching curved
272 quotes. In contrast, a call using a format like @t{"Missing '%s'"}
273 with only apostrophes typically generates a message like @t{"Missing
274 ’foo’"} with only closing curved quotes, an unusual style in English.
275
276 In batch mode, the message is printed to the standard error stream,
277 followed by a newline.
278
279 When @code{inhibit-message} is non-@code{nil}, no message will be displayed
280 in the echo area, it will only be logged to @samp{*Messages*}.
281
282 If @var{format-string} is @code{nil} or the empty string,
283 @code{message} clears the echo area; if the echo area has been
284 expanded automatically, this brings it back to its normal size. If
285 the minibuffer is active, this brings the minibuffer contents back
286 onto the screen immediately.
287
288 @example
289 @group
290 (message "Reverting `%s'..." (buffer-name))
291 @print{} Reverting ‘subr.el’...
292 @result{} "Reverting ‘subr.el’..."
293 @end group
294
295 @group
296 ---------- Echo Area ----------
297 Reverting ‘subr.el’...
298 ---------- Echo Area ----------
299 @end group
300 @end example
301
302 To automatically display a message in the echo area or in a pop-buffer,
303 depending on its size, use @code{display-message-or-buffer} (see below).
304
305 @strong{Warning:} If you want to use your own string as a message
306 verbatim, don't just write @code{(message @var{string})}. If
307 @var{string} contains @samp{%}, @samp{`}, or @samp{'} it may be
308 reformatted, with undesirable results. Instead, use @code{(message
309 "%s" @var{string})}.
310 @end defun
311
312 @defvar inhibit-message
313 When this variable is non-@code{nil}, @code{message} and related functions
314 will not use the Echo Area to display messages.
315 @end defvar
316
317 @defmac with-temp-message message &rest body
318 This construct displays a message in the echo area temporarily, during
319 the execution of @var{body}. It displays @var{message}, executes
320 @var{body}, then returns the value of the last body form while restoring
321 the previous echo area contents.
322 @end defmac
323
324 @defun message-or-box format-string &rest arguments
325 This function displays a message like @code{message}, but may display it
326 in a dialog box instead of the echo area. If this function is called in
327 a command that was invoked using the mouse---more precisely, if
328 @code{last-nonmenu-event} (@pxref{Command Loop Info}) is either
329 @code{nil} or a list---then it uses a dialog box or pop-up menu to
330 display the message. Otherwise, it uses the echo area. (This is the
331 same criterion that @code{y-or-n-p} uses to make a similar decision; see
332 @ref{Yes-or-No Queries}.)
333
334 You can force use of the mouse or of the echo area by binding
335 @code{last-nonmenu-event} to a suitable value around the call.
336 @end defun
337
338 @defun message-box format-string &rest arguments
339 @anchor{message-box}
340 This function displays a message like @code{message}, but uses a dialog
341 box (or a pop-up menu) whenever that is possible. If it is impossible
342 to use a dialog box or pop-up menu, because the terminal does not
343 support them, then @code{message-box} uses the echo area, like
344 @code{message}.
345 @end defun
346
347 @defun display-message-or-buffer message &optional buffer-name action frame
348 This function displays the message @var{message}, which may be either a
349 string or a buffer. If it is shorter than the maximum height of the
350 echo area, as defined by @code{max-mini-window-height}, it is displayed
351 in the echo area, using @code{message}. Otherwise,
352 @code{display-buffer} is used to show it in a pop-up buffer.
353
354 Returns either the string shown in the echo area, or when a pop-up
355 buffer is used, the window used to display it.
356
357 If @var{message} is a string, then the optional argument
358 @var{buffer-name} is the name of the buffer used to display it when a
359 pop-up buffer is used, defaulting to @file{*Message*}. In the case
360 where @var{message} is a string and displayed in the echo area, it is
361 not specified whether the contents are inserted into the buffer anyway.
362
363 The optional arguments @var{action} and @var{frame} are as for
364 @code{display-buffer}, and only used if a buffer is displayed.
365 @end defun
366
367 @defun current-message
368 This function returns the message currently being displayed in the
369 echo area, or @code{nil} if there is none.
370 @end defun
371
372 @node Progress
373 @subsection Reporting Operation Progress
374 @cindex progress reporting
375
376 When an operation can take a while to finish, you should inform the
377 user about the progress it makes. This way the user can estimate
378 remaining time and clearly see that Emacs is busy working, not hung.
379 A convenient way to do this is to use a @dfn{progress reporter}.
380
381 Here is a working example that does nothing useful:
382
383 @smallexample
384 (let ((progress-reporter
385 (make-progress-reporter "Collecting mana for Emacs..."
386 0 500)))
387 (dotimes (k 500)
388 (sit-for 0.01)
389 (progress-reporter-update progress-reporter k))
390 (progress-reporter-done progress-reporter))
391 @end smallexample
392
393 @defun make-progress-reporter message &optional min-value max-value current-value min-change min-time
394 This function creates and returns a progress reporter object, which
395 you will use as an argument for the other functions listed below. The
396 idea is to precompute as much data as possible to make progress
397 reporting very fast.
398
399 When this progress reporter is subsequently used, it will display
400 @var{message} in the echo area, followed by progress percentage.
401 @var{message} is treated as a simple string. If you need it to depend
402 on a filename, for instance, use @code{format-message} before calling this
403 function.
404
405 The arguments @var{min-value} and @var{max-value} should be numbers
406 standing for the starting and final states of the operation. For
407 instance, an operation that scans a buffer should set these to the
408 results of @code{point-min} and @code{point-max} correspondingly.
409 @var{max-value} should be greater than @var{min-value}.
410
411 Alternatively, you can set @var{min-value} and @var{max-value} to
412 @code{nil}. In that case, the progress reporter does not report
413 process percentages; it instead displays a ``spinner'' that rotates a
414 notch each time you update the progress reporter.
415
416 If @var{min-value} and @var{max-value} are numbers, you can give the
417 argument @var{current-value} a numerical value specifying the initial
418 progress; if omitted, this defaults to @var{min-value}.
419
420 The remaining arguments control the rate of echo area updates. The
421 progress reporter will wait for at least @var{min-change} more
422 percents of the operation to be completed before printing next
423 message; the default is one percent. @var{min-time} specifies the
424 minimum time in seconds to pass between successive prints; the default
425 is 0.2 seconds. (On some operating systems, the progress reporter may
426 handle fractions of seconds with varying precision).
427
428 This function calls @code{progress-reporter-update}, so the first
429 message is printed immediately.
430 @end defun
431
432 @defun progress-reporter-update reporter &optional value
433 This function does the main work of reporting progress of your
434 operation. It displays the message of @var{reporter}, followed by
435 progress percentage determined by @var{value}. If percentage is zero,
436 or close enough according to the @var{min-change} and @var{min-time}
437 arguments, then it is omitted from the output.
438
439 @var{reporter} must be the result of a call to
440 @code{make-progress-reporter}. @var{value} specifies the current
441 state of your operation and must be between @var{min-value} and
442 @var{max-value} (inclusive) as passed to
443 @code{make-progress-reporter}. For instance, if you scan a buffer,
444 then @var{value} should be the result of a call to @code{point}.
445
446 This function respects @var{min-change} and @var{min-time} as passed
447 to @code{make-progress-reporter} and so does not output new messages
448 on every invocation. It is thus very fast and normally you should not
449 try to reduce the number of calls to it: resulting overhead will most
450 likely negate your effort.
451 @end defun
452
453 @defun progress-reporter-force-update reporter &optional value new-message
454 This function is similar to @code{progress-reporter-update} except
455 that it prints a message in the echo area unconditionally.
456
457 The first two arguments have the same meaning as for
458 @code{progress-reporter-update}. Optional @var{new-message} allows
459 you to change the message of the @var{reporter}. Since this function
460 always updates the echo area, such a change will be immediately
461 presented to the user.
462 @end defun
463
464 @defun progress-reporter-done reporter
465 This function should be called when the operation is finished. It
466 prints the message of @var{reporter} followed by word @samp{done} in the
467 echo area.
468
469 You should always call this function and not hope for
470 @code{progress-reporter-update} to print @samp{100%}. Firstly, it may
471 never print it, there are many good reasons for this not to happen.
472 Secondly, @samp{done} is more explicit.
473 @end defun
474
475 @defmac dotimes-with-progress-reporter (var count [result]) message body@dots{}
476 This is a convenience macro that works the same way as @code{dotimes}
477 does, but also reports loop progress using the functions described
478 above. It allows you to save some typing.
479
480 You can rewrite the example in the beginning of this node using
481 this macro this way:
482
483 @example
484 (dotimes-with-progress-reporter
485 (k 500)
486 "Collecting some mana for Emacs..."
487 (sit-for 0.01))
488 @end example
489 @end defmac
490
491 @node Logging Messages
492 @subsection Logging Messages in @file{*Messages*}
493 @cindex logging echo-area messages
494
495 Almost all the messages displayed in the echo area are also recorded
496 in the @file{*Messages*} buffer so that the user can refer back to
497 them. This includes all the messages that are output with
498 @code{message}. By default, this buffer is read-only and uses the major
499 mode @code{messages-buffer-mode}. Nothing prevents the user from
500 killing the @file{*Messages*} buffer, but the next display of a message
501 recreates it. Any Lisp code that needs to access the
502 @file{*Messages*} buffer directly and wants to ensure that it exists
503 should use the function @code{messages-buffer}.
504
505 @defun messages-buffer
506 This function returns the @file{*Messages*} buffer. If it does not
507 exist, it creates it, and switches it to @code{messages-buffer-mode}.
508 @end defun
509
510 @defopt message-log-max
511 This variable specifies how many lines to keep in the @file{*Messages*}
512 buffer. The value @code{t} means there is no limit on how many lines to
513 keep. The value @code{nil} disables message logging entirely. Here's
514 how to display a message and prevent it from being logged:
515
516 @example
517 (let (message-log-max)
518 (message @dots{}))
519 @end example
520 @end defopt
521
522 To make @file{*Messages*} more convenient for the user, the logging
523 facility combines successive identical messages. It also combines
524 successive related messages for the sake of two cases: question
525 followed by answer, and a series of progress messages.
526
527 A question followed by an answer has two messages like the
528 ones produced by @code{y-or-n-p}: the first is @samp{@var{question}},
529 and the second is @samp{@var{question}...@var{answer}}. The first
530 message conveys no additional information beyond what's in the second,
531 so logging the second message discards the first from the log.
532
533 A series of progress messages has successive messages like
534 those produced by @code{make-progress-reporter}. They have the form
535 @samp{@var{base}...@var{how-far}}, where @var{base} is the same each
536 time, while @var{how-far} varies. Logging each message in the series
537 discards the previous one, provided they are consecutive.
538
539 The functions @code{make-progress-reporter} and @code{y-or-n-p}
540 don't have to do anything special to activate the message log
541 combination feature. It operates whenever two consecutive messages
542 are logged that share a common prefix ending in @samp{...}.
543
544 @node Echo Area Customization
545 @subsection Echo Area Customization
546 @cindex echo area customization
547
548 These variables control details of how the echo area works.
549
550 @defvar cursor-in-echo-area
551 This variable controls where the cursor appears when a message is
552 displayed in the echo area. If it is non-@code{nil}, then the cursor
553 appears at the end of the message. Otherwise, the cursor appears at
554 point---not in the echo area at all.
555
556 The value is normally @code{nil}; Lisp programs bind it to @code{t}
557 for brief periods of time.
558 @end defvar
559
560 @defvar echo-area-clear-hook
561 This normal hook is run whenever the echo area is cleared---either by
562 @code{(message nil)} or for any other reason.
563 @end defvar
564
565 @defopt echo-keystrokes
566 This variable determines how much time should elapse before command
567 characters echo. Its value must be a number, and specifies the
568 number of seconds to wait before echoing. If the user types a prefix
569 key (such as @kbd{C-x}) and then delays this many seconds before
570 continuing, the prefix key is echoed in the echo area. (Once echoing
571 begins in a key sequence, all subsequent characters in the same key
572 sequence are echoed immediately.)
573
574 If the value is zero, then command input is not echoed.
575 @end defopt
576
577 @defvar message-truncate-lines
578 Normally, displaying a long message resizes the echo area to display
579 the entire message. But if the variable @code{message-truncate-lines}
580 is non-@code{nil}, the echo area does not resize, and the message is
581 truncated to fit it.
582 @end defvar
583
584 The variable @code{max-mini-window-height}, which specifies the
585 maximum height for resizing minibuffer windows, also applies to the
586 echo area (which is really a special use of the minibuffer window;
587 @pxref{Minibuffer Misc}).
588
589 @node Warnings
590 @section Reporting Warnings
591 @cindex warnings
592
593 @dfn{Warnings} are a facility for a program to inform the user of a
594 possible problem, but continue running.
595
596 @menu
597 * Warning Basics:: Warnings concepts and functions to report them.
598 * Warning Variables:: Variables programs bind to customize their warnings.
599 * Warning Options:: Variables users set to control display of warnings.
600 * Delayed Warnings:: Deferring a warning until the end of a command.
601 @end menu
602
603 @node Warning Basics
604 @subsection Warning Basics
605 @cindex severity level
606
607 Every warning has a textual message, which explains the problem for
608 the user, and a @dfn{severity level} which is a symbol. Here are the
609 possible severity levels, in order of decreasing severity, and their
610 meanings:
611
612 @table @code
613 @item :emergency
614 A problem that will seriously impair Emacs operation soon
615 if you do not attend to it promptly.
616 @item :error
617 A report of data or circumstances that are inherently wrong.
618 @item :warning
619 A report of data or circumstances that are not inherently wrong, but
620 raise suspicion of a possible problem.
621 @item :debug
622 A report of information that may be useful if you are debugging.
623 @end table
624
625 When your program encounters invalid input data, it can either
626 signal a Lisp error by calling @code{error} or @code{signal} or report
627 a warning with severity @code{:error}. Signaling a Lisp error is the
628 easiest thing to do, but it means the program cannot continue
629 processing. If you want to take the trouble to implement a way to
630 continue processing despite the bad data, then reporting a warning of
631 severity @code{:error} is the right way to inform the user of the
632 problem. For instance, the Emacs Lisp byte compiler can report an
633 error that way and continue compiling other functions. (If the
634 program signals a Lisp error and then handles it with
635 @code{condition-case}, the user won't see the error message; it could
636 show the message to the user by reporting it as a warning.)
637
638 @c FIXME: Why use "(bytecomp)" instead of "'bytecomp" or simply
639 @c "bytecomp" here? The parens are part of warning-type-format but
640 @c not part of the warning type. --xfq
641 @cindex warning type
642 Each warning has a @dfn{warning type} to classify it. The type is a
643 list of symbols. The first symbol should be the custom group that you
644 use for the program's user options. For example, byte compiler
645 warnings use the warning type @code{(bytecomp)}. You can also
646 subcategorize the warnings, if you wish, by using more symbols in the
647 list.
648
649 @defun display-warning type message &optional level buffer-name
650 This function reports a warning, using @var{message} as the message
651 and @var{type} as the warning type. @var{level} should be the
652 severity level, with @code{:warning} being the default.
653
654 @var{buffer-name}, if non-@code{nil}, specifies the name of the buffer
655 for logging the warning. By default, it is @file{*Warnings*}.
656 @end defun
657
658 @defun lwarn type level message &rest args
659 This function reports a warning using the value of @code{(format-message
660 @var{message} @var{args}...)} as the message in the @file{*Warnings*}
661 buffer. In other respects it is equivalent to @code{display-warning}.
662 @end defun
663
664 @defun warn message &rest args
665 This function reports a warning using the value of @code{(format-message
666 @var{message} @var{args}...)} as the message, @code{(emacs)} as the
667 type, and @code{:warning} as the severity level. It exists for
668 compatibility only; we recommend not using it, because you should
669 specify a specific warning type.
670 @end defun
671
672 @node Warning Variables
673 @subsection Warning Variables
674 @cindex warning variables
675
676 Programs can customize how their warnings appear by binding
677 the variables described in this section.
678
679 @defvar warning-levels
680 This list defines the meaning and severity order of the warning
681 severity levels. Each element defines one severity level,
682 and they are arranged in order of decreasing severity.
683
684 Each element has the form @code{(@var{level} @var{string}
685 @var{function})}, where @var{level} is the severity level it defines.
686 @var{string} specifies the textual description of this level.
687 @var{string} should use @samp{%s} to specify where to put the warning
688 type information, or it can omit the @samp{%s} so as not to include
689 that information.
690
691 The optional @var{function}, if non-@code{nil}, is a function to call
692 with no arguments, to get the user's attention.
693
694 Normally you should not change the value of this variable.
695 @end defvar
696
697 @defvar warning-prefix-function
698 If non-@code{nil}, the value is a function to generate prefix text for
699 warnings. Programs can bind the variable to a suitable function.
700 @code{display-warning} calls this function with the warnings buffer
701 current, and the function can insert text in it. That text becomes
702 the beginning of the warning message.
703
704 The function is called with two arguments, the severity level and its
705 entry in @code{warning-levels}. It should return a list to use as the
706 entry (this value need not be an actual member of
707 @code{warning-levels}). By constructing this value, the function can
708 change the severity of the warning, or specify different handling for
709 a given severity level.
710
711 If the variable's value is @code{nil} then there is no function
712 to call.
713 @end defvar
714
715 @defvar warning-series
716 Programs can bind this variable to @code{t} to say that the next
717 warning should begin a series. When several warnings form a series,
718 that means to leave point on the first warning of the series, rather
719 than keep moving it for each warning so that it appears on the last one.
720 The series ends when the local binding is unbound and
721 @code{warning-series} becomes @code{nil} again.
722
723 The value can also be a symbol with a function definition. That is
724 equivalent to @code{t}, except that the next warning will also call
725 the function with no arguments with the warnings buffer current. The
726 function can insert text which will serve as a header for the series
727 of warnings.
728
729 Once a series has begun, the value is a marker which points to the
730 buffer position in the warnings buffer of the start of the series.
731
732 The variable's normal value is @code{nil}, which means to handle
733 each warning separately.
734 @end defvar
735
736 @defvar warning-fill-prefix
737 When this variable is non-@code{nil}, it specifies a fill prefix to
738 use for filling each warning's text.
739 @end defvar
740
741 @defvar warning-type-format
742 This variable specifies the format for displaying the warning type
743 in the warning message. The result of formatting the type this way
744 gets included in the message under the control of the string in the
745 entry in @code{warning-levels}. The default value is @code{" (%s)"}.
746 If you bind it to @code{""} then the warning type won't appear at
747 all.
748 @end defvar
749
750 @node Warning Options
751 @subsection Warning Options
752 @cindex warning options
753
754 These variables are used by users to control what happens
755 when a Lisp program reports a warning.
756
757 @defopt warning-minimum-level
758 This user option specifies the minimum severity level that should be
759 shown immediately to the user. The default is @code{:warning}, which
760 means to immediately display all warnings except @code{:debug}
761 warnings.
762 @end defopt
763
764 @defopt warning-minimum-log-level
765 This user option specifies the minimum severity level that should be
766 logged in the warnings buffer. The default is @code{:warning}, which
767 means to log all warnings except @code{:debug} warnings.
768 @end defopt
769
770 @defopt warning-suppress-types
771 This list specifies which warning types should not be displayed
772 immediately for the user. Each element of the list should be a list
773 of symbols. If its elements match the first elements in a warning
774 type, then that warning is not displayed immediately.
775 @end defopt
776
777 @defopt warning-suppress-log-types
778 This list specifies which warning types should not be logged in the
779 warnings buffer. Each element of the list should be a list of
780 symbols. If it matches the first few elements in a warning type, then
781 that warning is not logged.
782 @end defopt
783
784 @node Delayed Warnings
785 @subsection Delayed Warnings
786 @cindex delayed warnings
787
788 Sometimes, you may wish to avoid showing a warning while a command is
789 running, and only show it only after the end of the command. You can
790 use the variable @code{delayed-warnings-list} for this.
791
792 @defvar delayed-warnings-list
793 The value of this variable is a list of warnings to be displayed after
794 the current command has finished. Each element must be a list
795
796 @smallexample
797 (@var{type} @var{message} [@var{level} [@var{buffer-name}]])
798 @end smallexample
799
800 @noindent
801 with the same form, and the same meanings, as the argument list of
802 @code{display-warning} (@pxref{Warning Basics}). Immediately after
803 running @code{post-command-hook} (@pxref{Command Overview}), the Emacs
804 command loop displays all the warnings specified by this variable,
805 then resets it to @code{nil}.
806 @end defvar
807
808 Programs which need to further customize the delayed warnings
809 mechanism can change the variable @code{delayed-warnings-hook}:
810
811 @defvar delayed-warnings-hook
812 This is a normal hook which is run by the Emacs command loop, after
813 @code{post-command-hook}, in order to to process and display delayed
814 warnings.
815
816 Its default value is a list of two functions:
817
818 @smallexample
819 (collapse-delayed-warnings display-delayed-warnings)
820 @end smallexample
821
822 @findex collapse-delayed-warnings
823 @findex display-delayed-warnings
824 @noindent
825 The function @code{collapse-delayed-warnings} removes repeated entries
826 from @code{delayed-warnings-list}. The function
827 @code{display-delayed-warnings} calls @code{display-warning} on each
828 of the entries in @code{delayed-warnings-list}, in turn, and then sets
829 @code{delayed-warnings-list} to @code{nil}.
830 @end defvar
831
832 @node Invisible Text
833 @section Invisible Text
834
835 @cindex invisible text
836 You can make characters @dfn{invisible}, so that they do not appear on
837 the screen, with the @code{invisible} property. This can be either a
838 text property (@pxref{Text Properties}) or an overlay property
839 (@pxref{Overlays}). Cursor motion also partly ignores these
840 characters; if the command loop finds that point is inside a range of
841 invisible text after a command, it relocates point to the other side
842 of the text.
843
844 In the simplest case, any non-@code{nil} @code{invisible} property makes
845 a character invisible. This is the default case---if you don't alter
846 the default value of @code{buffer-invisibility-spec}, this is how the
847 @code{invisible} property works. You should normally use @code{t}
848 as the value of the @code{invisible} property if you don't plan
849 to set @code{buffer-invisibility-spec} yourself.
850
851 More generally, you can use the variable @code{buffer-invisibility-spec}
852 to control which values of the @code{invisible} property make text
853 invisible. This permits you to classify the text into different subsets
854 in advance, by giving them different @code{invisible} values, and
855 subsequently make various subsets visible or invisible by changing the
856 value of @code{buffer-invisibility-spec}.
857
858 Controlling visibility with @code{buffer-invisibility-spec} is
859 especially useful in a program to display the list of entries in a
860 database. It permits the implementation of convenient filtering
861 commands to view just a part of the entries in the database. Setting
862 this variable is very fast, much faster than scanning all the text in
863 the buffer looking for properties to change.
864
865 @defvar buffer-invisibility-spec
866 This variable specifies which kinds of @code{invisible} properties
867 actually make a character invisible. Setting this variable makes it
868 buffer-local.
869
870 @table @asis
871 @item @code{t}
872 A character is invisible if its @code{invisible} property is
873 non-@code{nil}. This is the default.
874
875 @item a list
876 Each element of the list specifies a criterion for invisibility; if a
877 character's @code{invisible} property fits any one of these criteria,
878 the character is invisible. The list can have two kinds of elements:
879
880 @table @code
881 @item @var{atom}
882 A character is invisible if its @code{invisible} property value is
883 @var{atom} or if it is a list with @var{atom} as a member; comparison
884 is done with @code{eq}.
885
886 @item (@var{atom} . t)
887 A character is invisible if its @code{invisible} property value is
888 @var{atom} or if it is a list with @var{atom} as a member; comparison
889 is done with @code{eq}. Moreover, a sequence of such characters
890 displays as an ellipsis.
891 @end table
892 @end table
893 @end defvar
894
895 Two functions are specifically provided for adding elements to
896 @code{buffer-invisibility-spec} and removing elements from it.
897
898 @defun add-to-invisibility-spec element
899 This function adds the element @var{element} to
900 @code{buffer-invisibility-spec}. If @code{buffer-invisibility-spec}
901 was @code{t}, it changes to a list, @code{(t)}, so that text whose
902 @code{invisible} property is @code{t} remains invisible.
903 @end defun
904
905 @defun remove-from-invisibility-spec element
906 This removes the element @var{element} from
907 @code{buffer-invisibility-spec}. This does nothing if @var{element}
908 is not in the list.
909 @end defun
910
911 A convention for use of @code{buffer-invisibility-spec} is that a
912 major mode should use the mode's own name as an element of
913 @code{buffer-invisibility-spec} and as the value of the
914 @code{invisible} property:
915
916 @example
917 ;; @r{If you want to display an ellipsis:}
918 (add-to-invisibility-spec '(my-symbol . t))
919 ;; @r{If you don't want ellipsis:}
920 (add-to-invisibility-spec 'my-symbol)
921
922 (overlay-put (make-overlay beginning end)
923 'invisible 'my-symbol)
924
925 ;; @r{When done with the invisibility:}
926 (remove-from-invisibility-spec '(my-symbol . t))
927 ;; @r{Or respectively:}
928 (remove-from-invisibility-spec 'my-symbol)
929 @end example
930
931 You can check for invisibility using the following function:
932
933 @defun invisible-p pos-or-prop
934 If @var{pos-or-prop} is a marker or number, this function returns a
935 non-@code{nil} value if the text at that position is invisible.
936
937 If @var{pos-or-prop} is any other kind of Lisp object, that is taken
938 to mean a possible value of the @code{invisible} text or overlay
939 property. In that case, this function returns a non-@code{nil} value
940 if that value would cause text to become invisible, based on the
941 current value of @code{buffer-invisibility-spec}.
942 @end defun
943
944 @vindex line-move-ignore-invisible
945 Ordinarily, functions that operate on text or move point do not care
946 whether the text is invisible, they process invisible characters and
947 visible characters alike. The user-level line motion commands,
948 such as @code{next-line}, @code{previous-line}, ignore invisible
949 newlines if @code{line-move-ignore-invisible} is non-@code{nil} (the
950 default), i.e., behave like these invisible newlines didn't exist in
951 the buffer, but only because they are explicitly programmed to do so.
952
953 If a command ends with point inside or at the boundary of
954 invisible text, the main editing loop relocates point to one of the
955 two ends of the invisible text. Emacs chooses the direction of
956 relocation so that it is the same as the overall movement direction of
957 the command; if in doubt, it prefers a position where an inserted char
958 would not inherit the @code{invisible} property. Additionally, if the
959 text is not replaced by an ellipsis and the command only moved within
960 the invisible text, then point is moved one extra character so as to
961 try and reflect the command's movement by a visible movement of the
962 cursor.
963
964 Thus, if the command moved point back to an invisible range (with the usual
965 stickiness), Emacs moves point back to the beginning of that range. If the
966 command moved point forward into an invisible range, Emacs moves point forward
967 to the first visible character that follows the invisible text and then forward
968 one more character.
969
970 These @dfn{adjustments} of point that ended up in the middle of
971 invisible text can be disabled by setting @code{disable-point-adjustment}
972 to a non-@code{nil} value. @xref{Adjusting Point}.
973
974 Incremental search can make invisible overlays visible temporarily
975 and/or permanently when a match includes invisible text. To enable
976 this, the overlay should have a non-@code{nil}
977 @code{isearch-open-invisible} property. The property value should be a
978 function to be called with the overlay as an argument. This function
979 should make the overlay visible permanently; it is used when the match
980 overlaps the overlay on exit from the search.
981
982 During the search, such overlays are made temporarily visible by
983 temporarily modifying their invisible and intangible properties. If you
984 want this to be done differently for a certain overlay, give it an
985 @code{isearch-open-invisible-temporary} property which is a function.
986 The function is called with two arguments: the first is the overlay, and
987 the second is @code{nil} to make the overlay visible, or @code{t} to
988 make it invisible again.
989
990 @node Selective Display
991 @section Selective Display
992 @c @cindex selective display Duplicates selective-display
993
994 @dfn{Selective display} refers to a pair of related features for
995 hiding certain lines on the screen.
996
997 @cindex explicit selective display
998 The first variant, explicit selective display, was designed for use in a Lisp
999 program: it controls which lines are hidden by altering the text. This kind of
1000 hiding is now obsolete; instead you can get the same effect with the
1001 @code{invisible} property (@pxref{Invisible Text}).
1002
1003 In the second variant, the choice of lines to hide is made
1004 automatically based on indentation. This variant is designed to be a
1005 user-level feature.
1006
1007 The way you control explicit selective display is by replacing a
1008 newline (control-j) with a carriage return (control-m). The text that
1009 was formerly a line following that newline is now hidden. Strictly
1010 speaking, it is temporarily no longer a line at all, since only
1011 newlines can separate lines; it is now part of the previous line.
1012
1013 Selective display does not directly affect editing commands. For
1014 example, @kbd{C-f} (@code{forward-char}) moves point unhesitatingly
1015 into hidden text. However, the replacement of newline characters with
1016 carriage return characters affects some editing commands. For
1017 example, @code{next-line} skips hidden lines, since it searches only
1018 for newlines. Modes that use selective display can also define
1019 commands that take account of the newlines, or that control which
1020 parts of the text are hidden.
1021
1022 When you write a selectively displayed buffer into a file, all the
1023 control-m's are output as newlines. This means that when you next read
1024 in the file, it looks OK, with nothing hidden. The selective display
1025 effect is seen only within Emacs.
1026
1027 @defvar selective-display
1028 This buffer-local variable enables selective display. This means that
1029 lines, or portions of lines, may be made hidden.
1030
1031 @itemize @bullet
1032 @item
1033 If the value of @code{selective-display} is @code{t}, then the character
1034 control-m marks the start of hidden text; the control-m, and the rest
1035 of the line following it, are not displayed. This is explicit selective
1036 display.
1037
1038 @item
1039 If the value of @code{selective-display} is a positive integer, then
1040 lines that start with more than that many columns of indentation are not
1041 displayed.
1042 @end itemize
1043
1044 When some portion of a buffer is hidden, the vertical movement
1045 commands operate as if that portion did not exist, allowing a single
1046 @code{next-line} command to skip any number of hidden lines.
1047 However, character movement commands (such as @code{forward-char}) do
1048 not skip the hidden portion, and it is possible (if tricky) to insert
1049 or delete text in an hidden portion.
1050
1051 In the examples below, we show the @emph{display appearance} of the
1052 buffer @code{foo}, which changes with the value of
1053 @code{selective-display}. The @emph{contents} of the buffer do not
1054 change.
1055
1056 @example
1057 @group
1058 (setq selective-display nil)
1059 @result{} nil
1060
1061 ---------- Buffer: foo ----------
1062 1 on this column
1063 2on this column
1064 3n this column
1065 3n this column
1066 2on this column
1067 1 on this column
1068 ---------- Buffer: foo ----------
1069 @end group
1070
1071 @group
1072 (setq selective-display 2)
1073 @result{} 2
1074
1075 ---------- Buffer: foo ----------
1076 1 on this column
1077 2on this column
1078 2on this column
1079 1 on this column
1080 ---------- Buffer: foo ----------
1081 @end group
1082 @end example
1083 @end defvar
1084
1085 @defopt selective-display-ellipses
1086 If this buffer-local variable is non-@code{nil}, then Emacs displays
1087 @samp{@dots{}} at the end of a line that is followed by hidden text.
1088 This example is a continuation of the previous one.
1089
1090 @example
1091 @group
1092 (setq selective-display-ellipses t)
1093 @result{} t
1094
1095 ---------- Buffer: foo ----------
1096 1 on this column
1097 2on this column ...
1098 2on this column
1099 1 on this column
1100 ---------- Buffer: foo ----------
1101 @end group
1102 @end example
1103
1104 You can use a display table to substitute other text for the ellipsis
1105 (@samp{@dots{}}). @xref{Display Tables}.
1106 @end defopt
1107
1108 @node Temporary Displays
1109 @section Temporary Displays
1110 @cindex temporary display
1111 @cindex temporary buffer display
1112
1113 Temporary displays are used by Lisp programs to put output into a
1114 buffer and then present it to the user for perusal rather than for
1115 editing. Many help commands use this feature.
1116
1117 @defmac with-output-to-temp-buffer buffer-name body@dots{}
1118 This function executes the forms in @var{body} while arranging to insert
1119 any output they print into the buffer named @var{buffer-name}, which is
1120 first created if necessary, and put into Help mode. (See the similar
1121 form @code{with-temp-buffer-window} below.) Finally, the buffer is
1122 displayed in some window, but that window is not selected.
1123
1124 If the forms in @var{body} do not change the major mode in the output
1125 buffer, so that it is still Help mode at the end of their execution,
1126 then @code{with-output-to-temp-buffer} makes this buffer read-only at
1127 the end, and also scans it for function and variable names to make them
1128 into clickable cross-references. @xref{Docstring hyperlinks, , Tips for
1129 Documentation Strings}, in particular the item on hyperlinks in
1130 documentation strings, for more details.
1131
1132 The string @var{buffer-name} specifies the temporary buffer, which need
1133 not already exist. The argument must be a string, not a buffer. The
1134 buffer is erased initially (with no questions asked), and it is marked
1135 as unmodified after @code{with-output-to-temp-buffer} exits.
1136
1137 @code{with-output-to-temp-buffer} binds @code{standard-output} to the
1138 temporary buffer, then it evaluates the forms in @var{body}. Output
1139 using the Lisp output functions within @var{body} goes by default to
1140 that buffer (but screen display and messages in the echo area, although
1141 they are ``output'' in the general sense of the word, are not affected).
1142 @xref{Output Functions}.
1143
1144 Several hooks are available for customizing the behavior
1145 of this construct; they are listed below.
1146
1147 The value of the last form in @var{body} is returned.
1148
1149 @example
1150 @group
1151 ---------- Buffer: foo ----------
1152 This is the contents of foo.
1153 ---------- Buffer: foo ----------
1154 @end group
1155
1156 @group
1157 (with-output-to-temp-buffer "foo"
1158 (print 20)
1159 (print standard-output))
1160 @result{} #<buffer foo>
1161
1162 ---------- Buffer: foo ----------
1163
1164 20
1165
1166 #<buffer foo>
1167
1168 ---------- Buffer: foo ----------
1169 @end group
1170 @end example
1171 @end defmac
1172
1173 @defopt temp-buffer-show-function
1174 If this variable is non-@code{nil}, @code{with-output-to-temp-buffer}
1175 calls it as a function to do the job of displaying a help buffer. The
1176 function gets one argument, which is the buffer it should display.
1177
1178 It is a good idea for this function to run @code{temp-buffer-show-hook}
1179 just as @code{with-output-to-temp-buffer} normally would, inside of
1180 @code{save-selected-window} and with the chosen window and buffer
1181 selected.
1182 @end defopt
1183
1184 @defvar temp-buffer-setup-hook
1185 This normal hook is run by @code{with-output-to-temp-buffer} before
1186 evaluating @var{body}. When the hook runs, the temporary buffer is
1187 current. This hook is normally set up with a function to put the
1188 buffer in Help mode.
1189 @end defvar
1190
1191 @defvar temp-buffer-show-hook
1192 This normal hook is run by @code{with-output-to-temp-buffer} after
1193 displaying the temporary buffer. When the hook runs, the temporary buffer
1194 is current, and the window it was displayed in is selected.
1195 @end defvar
1196
1197 @defmac with-temp-buffer-window buffer-or-name action quit-function body@dots{}
1198 This macro is similar to @code{with-output-to-temp-buffer}. Like that
1199 construct, it executes @var{body} while arranging to insert any output
1200 it prints into the buffer named @var{buffer-or-name} and displays that
1201 buffer in some window. Unlike @code{with-output-to-temp-buffer},
1202 however, it does not automatically switch that buffer to Help mode.
1203
1204 The argument @var{buffer-or-name} specifies the temporary buffer. It
1205 can be either a buffer, which must already exist, or a string, in which
1206 case a buffer of that name is created, if necessary. The buffer is
1207 marked as unmodified and read-only when @code{with-temp-buffer-window}
1208 exits.
1209
1210 This macro does not call @code{temp-buffer-show-function}. Rather, it
1211 passes the @var{action} argument to @code{display-buffer}
1212 (@pxref{Choosing Window}) in order to display the buffer.
1213
1214 The value of the last form in @var{body} is returned, unless the
1215 argument @var{quit-function} is specified. In that case, it is called
1216 with two arguments: the window showing the buffer and the result of
1217 @var{body}. The final return value is then whatever @var{quit-function}
1218 returns.
1219
1220 @vindex temp-buffer-window-setup-hook
1221 @vindex temp-buffer-window-show-hook
1222 This macro uses the normal hooks @code{temp-buffer-window-setup-hook}
1223 and @code{temp-buffer-window-show-hook} in place of the analogous hooks
1224 run by @code{with-output-to-temp-buffer}.
1225 @end defmac
1226
1227 The two constructs described next are mostly identical to
1228 @code{with-temp-buffer-window} but differ from it as specified:
1229
1230 @defmac with-current-buffer-window buffer-or-name action quit-function &rest body
1231 This macro is like @code{with-temp-buffer-window} but unlike that makes
1232 the buffer specified by @var{buffer-or-name} current for running
1233 @var{body}.
1234 @end defmac
1235
1236 @defmac with-displayed-buffer-window buffer-or-name action quit-function &rest body
1237 This macro is like @code{with-current-buffer-window} but unlike that
1238 displays the buffer specified by @var{buffer-or-name} @emph{before}
1239 running @var{body}.
1240 @end defmac
1241
1242 A window showing a temporary buffer can be fit to the size of that
1243 buffer using the following mode:
1244
1245 @defopt temp-buffer-resize-mode
1246 When this minor mode is enabled, windows showing a temporary buffer are
1247 automatically resized to fit their buffer's contents.
1248
1249 A window is resized if and only if it has been specially created for the
1250 buffer. In particular, windows that have shown another buffer before
1251 are not resized. By default, this mode uses @code{fit-window-to-buffer}
1252 (@pxref{Resizing Windows}) for resizing. You can specify a different
1253 function by customizing the options @code{temp-buffer-max-height} and
1254 @code{temp-buffer-max-width} below.
1255 @end defopt
1256
1257 @defopt temp-buffer-max-height
1258 This option specifies the maximum height (in lines) of a window
1259 displaying a temporary buffer when @code{temp-buffer-resize-mode} is
1260 enabled. It can also be a function to be called to choose the height
1261 for such a buffer. It gets one argument, the buffer, and should return
1262 a positive integer. At the time the function is called, the window to
1263 be resized is selected.
1264 @end defopt
1265
1266 @defopt temp-buffer-max-width
1267 This option specifies the maximum width of a window (in columns)
1268 displaying a temporary buffer when @code{temp-buffer-resize-mode} is
1269 enabled. It can also be a function to be called to choose the width for
1270 such a buffer. It gets one argument, the buffer, and should return a
1271 positive integer. At the time the function is called, the window to be
1272 resized is selected.
1273 @end defopt
1274
1275 The following function uses the current buffer for temporal display:
1276
1277 @defun momentary-string-display string position &optional char message
1278 This function momentarily displays @var{string} in the current buffer at
1279 @var{position}. It has no effect on the undo list or on the buffer's
1280 modification status.
1281
1282 The momentary display remains until the next input event. If the next
1283 input event is @var{char}, @code{momentary-string-display} ignores it
1284 and returns. Otherwise, that event remains buffered for subsequent use
1285 as input. Thus, typing @var{char} will simply remove the string from
1286 the display, while typing (say) @kbd{C-f} will remove the string from
1287 the display and later (presumably) move point forward. The argument
1288 @var{char} is a space by default.
1289
1290 The return value of @code{momentary-string-display} is not meaningful.
1291
1292 If the string @var{string} does not contain control characters, you can
1293 do the same job in a more general way by creating (and then subsequently
1294 deleting) an overlay with a @code{before-string} property.
1295 @xref{Overlay Properties}.
1296
1297 If @var{message} is non-@code{nil}, it is displayed in the echo area
1298 while @var{string} is displayed in the buffer. If it is @code{nil}, a
1299 default message says to type @var{char} to continue.
1300
1301 In this example, point is initially located at the beginning of the
1302 second line:
1303
1304 @example
1305 @group
1306 ---------- Buffer: foo ----------
1307 This is the contents of foo.
1308 @point{}Second line.
1309 ---------- Buffer: foo ----------
1310 @end group
1311
1312 @group
1313 (momentary-string-display
1314 "**** Important Message! ****"
1315 (point) ?\r
1316 "Type RET when done reading")
1317 @result{} t
1318 @end group
1319
1320 @group
1321 ---------- Buffer: foo ----------
1322 This is the contents of foo.
1323 **** Important Message! ****Second line.
1324 ---------- Buffer: foo ----------
1325
1326 ---------- Echo Area ----------
1327 Type RET when done reading
1328 ---------- Echo Area ----------
1329 @end group
1330 @end example
1331 @end defun
1332
1333 @node Overlays
1334 @section Overlays
1335 @cindex overlays
1336 @c FIXME: mention intervals in this section?
1337
1338 You can use @dfn{overlays} to alter the appearance of a buffer's text on
1339 the screen, for the sake of presentation features. An overlay is an
1340 object that belongs to a particular buffer, and has a specified
1341 beginning and end. It also has properties that you can examine and set;
1342 these affect the display of the text within the overlay.
1343
1344 @cindex scalability of overlays
1345 @cindex overlays, scalability
1346 The visual effect of an overlay is the same as of the corresponding
1347 text property (@pxref{Text Properties}). However, due to a different
1348 implementation, overlays generally don't scale well (many operations
1349 take a time that is proportional to the number of overlays in the
1350 buffer). If you need to affect the visual appearance of many portions
1351 in the buffer, we recommend using text properties.
1352
1353 An overlay uses markers to record its beginning and end; thus,
1354 editing the text of the buffer adjusts the beginning and end of each
1355 overlay so that it stays with the text. When you create the overlay,
1356 you can specify whether text inserted at the beginning should be
1357 inside the overlay or outside, and likewise for the end of the overlay.
1358
1359 @menu
1360 * Managing Overlays:: Creating and moving overlays.
1361 * Overlay Properties:: How to read and set properties.
1362 What properties do to the screen display.
1363 * Finding Overlays:: Searching for overlays.
1364 @end menu
1365
1366 @node Managing Overlays
1367 @subsection Managing Overlays
1368 @cindex managing overlays
1369 @cindex overlays, managing
1370
1371 This section describes the functions to create, delete and move
1372 overlays, and to examine their contents. Overlay changes are not
1373 recorded in the buffer's undo list, since the overlays are not
1374 part of the buffer's contents.
1375
1376 @defun overlayp object
1377 This function returns @code{t} if @var{object} is an overlay.
1378 @end defun
1379
1380 @defun make-overlay start end &optional buffer front-advance rear-advance
1381 This function creates and returns an overlay that belongs to
1382 @var{buffer} and ranges from @var{start} to @var{end}. Both @var{start}
1383 and @var{end} must specify buffer positions; they may be integers or
1384 markers. If @var{buffer} is omitted, the overlay is created in the
1385 current buffer.
1386
1387 @cindex empty overlay
1388 @cindex overlay, empty
1389 An overlay whose @var{start} and @var{end} specify the same buffer
1390 position is known as @dfn{empty}. A non-empty overlay can become
1391 empty if the text between its @var{start} and @var{end} is deleted.
1392 When that happens, the overlay is by default not deleted, but you can
1393 cause it to be deleted by giving it the @samp{evaporate} property
1394 (@pxref{Overlay Properties, evaporate property}).
1395
1396 The arguments @var{front-advance} and @var{rear-advance} specify the
1397 marker insertion type for the start of the overlay and for the end of
1398 the overlay, respectively. @xref{Marker Insertion Types}. If they
1399 are both @code{nil}, the default, then the overlay extends to include
1400 any text inserted at the beginning, but not text inserted at the end.
1401 If @var{front-advance} is non-@code{nil}, text inserted at the
1402 beginning of the overlay is excluded from the overlay. If
1403 @var{rear-advance} is non-@code{nil}, text inserted at the end of the
1404 overlay is included in the overlay.
1405 @end defun
1406
1407 @defun overlay-start overlay
1408 This function returns the position at which @var{overlay} starts,
1409 as an integer.
1410 @end defun
1411
1412 @defun overlay-end overlay
1413 This function returns the position at which @var{overlay} ends,
1414 as an integer.
1415 @end defun
1416
1417 @defun overlay-buffer overlay
1418 This function returns the buffer that @var{overlay} belongs to. It
1419 returns @code{nil} if @var{overlay} has been deleted.
1420 @end defun
1421
1422 @defun delete-overlay overlay
1423 This function deletes @var{overlay}. The overlay continues to exist as
1424 a Lisp object, and its property list is unchanged, but it ceases to be
1425 attached to the buffer it belonged to, and ceases to have any effect on
1426 display.
1427
1428 A deleted overlay is not permanently disconnected. You can give it a
1429 position in a buffer again by calling @code{move-overlay}.
1430 @end defun
1431
1432 @defun move-overlay overlay start end &optional buffer
1433 This function moves @var{overlay} to @var{buffer}, and places its bounds
1434 at @var{start} and @var{end}. Both arguments @var{start} and @var{end}
1435 must specify buffer positions; they may be integers or markers.
1436
1437 If @var{buffer} is omitted, @var{overlay} stays in the same buffer it
1438 was already associated with; if @var{overlay} was deleted, it goes into
1439 the current buffer.
1440
1441 The return value is @var{overlay}.
1442
1443 This is the only valid way to change the endpoints of an overlay. Do
1444 not try modifying the markers in the overlay by hand, as that fails to
1445 update other vital data structures and can cause some overlays to be
1446 lost.
1447 @end defun
1448
1449 @defun remove-overlays &optional start end name value
1450 This function removes all the overlays between @var{start} and
1451 @var{end} whose property @var{name} has the value @var{value}. It can
1452 move the endpoints of the overlays in the region, or split them.
1453
1454 If @var{name} is omitted or @code{nil}, it means to delete all overlays in
1455 the specified region. If @var{start} and/or @var{end} are omitted or
1456 @code{nil}, that means the beginning and end of the buffer respectively.
1457 Therefore, @code{(remove-overlays)} removes all the overlays in the
1458 current buffer.
1459 @end defun
1460
1461 @defun copy-overlay overlay
1462 This function returns a copy of @var{overlay}. The copy has the same
1463 endpoints and properties as @var{overlay}. However, the marker
1464 insertion type for the start of the overlay and for the end of the
1465 overlay are set to their default values (@pxref{Marker Insertion
1466 Types}).
1467 @end defun
1468
1469 Here are some examples:
1470
1471 @example
1472 ;; @r{Create an overlay.}
1473 (setq foo (make-overlay 1 10))
1474 @result{} #<overlay from 1 to 10 in display.texi>
1475 (overlay-start foo)
1476 @result{} 1
1477 (overlay-end foo)
1478 @result{} 10
1479 (overlay-buffer foo)
1480 @result{} #<buffer display.texi>
1481 ;; @r{Give it a property we can check later.}
1482 (overlay-put foo 'happy t)
1483 @result{} t
1484 ;; @r{Verify the property is present.}
1485 (overlay-get foo 'happy)
1486 @result{} t
1487 ;; @r{Move the overlay.}
1488 (move-overlay foo 5 20)
1489 @result{} #<overlay from 5 to 20 in display.texi>
1490 (overlay-start foo)
1491 @result{} 5
1492 (overlay-end foo)
1493 @result{} 20
1494 ;; @r{Delete the overlay.}
1495 (delete-overlay foo)
1496 @result{} nil
1497 ;; @r{Verify it is deleted.}
1498 foo
1499 @result{} #<overlay in no buffer>
1500 ;; @r{A deleted overlay has no position.}
1501 (overlay-start foo)
1502 @result{} nil
1503 (overlay-end foo)
1504 @result{} nil
1505 (overlay-buffer foo)
1506 @result{} nil
1507 ;; @r{Undelete the overlay.}
1508 (move-overlay foo 1 20)
1509 @result{} #<overlay from 1 to 20 in display.texi>
1510 ;; @r{Verify the results.}
1511 (overlay-start foo)
1512 @result{} 1
1513 (overlay-end foo)
1514 @result{} 20
1515 (overlay-buffer foo)
1516 @result{} #<buffer display.texi>
1517 ;; @r{Moving and deleting the overlay does not change its properties.}
1518 (overlay-get foo 'happy)
1519 @result{} t
1520 @end example
1521
1522 Emacs stores the overlays of each buffer in two lists, divided
1523 around an arbitrary center position. One list extends backwards
1524 through the buffer from that center position, and the other extends
1525 forwards from that center position. The center position can be anywhere
1526 in the buffer.
1527
1528 @defun overlay-recenter pos
1529 This function recenters the overlays of the current buffer around
1530 position @var{pos}. That makes overlay lookup faster for positions
1531 near @var{pos}, but slower for positions far away from @var{pos}.
1532 @end defun
1533
1534 A loop that scans the buffer forwards, creating overlays, can run
1535 faster if you do @code{(overlay-recenter (point-max))} first.
1536
1537 @node Overlay Properties
1538 @subsection Overlay Properties
1539 @cindex overlay properties
1540
1541 Overlay properties are like text properties in that the properties that
1542 alter how a character is displayed can come from either source. But in
1543 most respects they are different. @xref{Text Properties}, for comparison.
1544
1545 Text properties are considered a part of the text; overlays and
1546 their properties are specifically considered not to be part of the
1547 text. Thus, copying text between various buffers and strings
1548 preserves text properties, but does not try to preserve overlays.
1549 Changing a buffer's text properties marks the buffer as modified,
1550 while moving an overlay or changing its properties does not. Unlike
1551 text property changes, overlay property changes are not recorded in
1552 the buffer's undo list.
1553
1554 Since more than one overlay can specify a property value for the
1555 same character, Emacs lets you specify a priority value of each
1556 overlay. In case two overlays have the same priority value, and one
1557 is nested in the other, then the inner one will have priority over the
1558 outer one. If neither is nested in the other then you should not make
1559 assumptions about which overlay will prevail.
1560
1561 These functions read and set the properties of an overlay:
1562
1563 @defun overlay-get overlay prop
1564 This function returns the value of property @var{prop} recorded in
1565 @var{overlay}, if any. If @var{overlay} does not record any value for
1566 that property, but it does have a @code{category} property which is a
1567 symbol, that symbol's @var{prop} property is used. Otherwise, the value
1568 is @code{nil}.
1569 @end defun
1570
1571 @defun overlay-put overlay prop value
1572 This function sets the value of property @var{prop} recorded in
1573 @var{overlay} to @var{value}. It returns @var{value}.
1574 @end defun
1575
1576 @defun overlay-properties overlay
1577 This returns a copy of the property list of @var{overlay}.
1578 @end defun
1579
1580 See also the function @code{get-char-property} which checks both
1581 overlay properties and text properties for a given character.
1582 @xref{Examining Properties}.
1583
1584 Many overlay properties have special meanings; here is a table
1585 of them:
1586
1587 @table @code
1588 @item priority
1589 @kindex priority @r{(overlay property)}
1590 This property's value determines the priority of the overlay.
1591 If you want to specify a priority value, use either @code{nil}
1592 (or zero), or a positive integer. Any other value has undefined behavior.
1593
1594 The priority matters when two or more overlays cover the same
1595 character and both specify the same property; the one whose
1596 @code{priority} value is larger overrides the other. For the
1597 @code{face} property, the higher priority overlay's value does not
1598 completely override the other value; instead, its face attributes
1599 override the face attributes of the lower priority @code{face}
1600 property.
1601
1602 Currently, all overlays take priority over text properties.
1603
1604 Note that Emacs sometimes uses non-numeric priority values for some of
1605 its internal overlays, so do not try to do arithmetic on the
1606 priority of an overlay (unless it is one that you created). If you
1607 need to put overlays in priority order, use the @var{sorted} argument
1608 of @code{overlays-at}. @xref{Finding Overlays}.
1609
1610 @item window
1611 @kindex window @r{(overlay property)}
1612 If the @code{window} property is non-@code{nil}, then the overlay
1613 applies only on that window.
1614
1615 @item category
1616 @kindex category @r{(overlay property)}
1617 If an overlay has a @code{category} property, we call it the
1618 @dfn{category} of the overlay. It should be a symbol. The properties
1619 of the symbol serve as defaults for the properties of the overlay.
1620
1621 @item face
1622 @kindex face @r{(overlay property)}
1623 This property controls the appearance of the text (@pxref{Faces}).
1624 The value of the property can be the following:
1625
1626 @itemize @bullet
1627 @item
1628 A face name (a symbol or string).
1629
1630 @item
1631 An anonymous face: a property list of the form @code{(@var{keyword}
1632 @var{value} @dots{})}, where each @var{keyword} is a face attribute
1633 name and @var{value} is a value for that attribute.
1634
1635 @item
1636 A list of faces. Each list element should be either a face name or an
1637 anonymous face. This specifies a face which is an aggregate of the
1638 attributes of each of the listed faces. Faces occurring earlier in
1639 the list have higher priority.
1640
1641 @item
1642 A cons cell of the form @code{(foreground-color . @var{color-name})}
1643 or @code{(background-color . @var{color-name})}. This specifies the
1644 foreground or background color, similar to @code{(:foreground
1645 @var{color-name})} or @code{(:background @var{color-name})}. This
1646 form is supported for backward compatibility only, and should be
1647 avoided.
1648 @end itemize
1649
1650 @item mouse-face
1651 @kindex mouse-face @r{(overlay property)}
1652 This property is used instead of @code{face} when the mouse is within
1653 the range of the overlay. However, Emacs ignores all face attributes
1654 from this property that alter the text size (e.g., @code{:height},
1655 @code{:weight}, and @code{:slant}). Those attributes are always the
1656 same as in the unhighlighted text.
1657
1658 @item display
1659 @kindex display @r{(overlay property)}
1660 This property activates various features that change the
1661 way text is displayed. For example, it can make text appear taller
1662 or shorter, higher or lower, wider or narrower, or replaced with an image.
1663 @xref{Display Property}.
1664
1665 @item help-echo
1666 @kindex help-echo @r{(overlay property)}
1667 If an overlay has a @code{help-echo} property, then when you move the
1668 mouse onto the text in the overlay, Emacs displays a help string in the
1669 echo area, or in the tooltip window. For details see @ref{Text
1670 help-echo}.
1671
1672 @item field
1673 @kindex field @r{(overlay property)}
1674 @c Copied from Special Properties.
1675 Consecutive characters with the same @code{field} property constitute a
1676 @emph{field}. Some motion functions including @code{forward-word} and
1677 @code{beginning-of-line} stop moving at a field boundary.
1678 @xref{Fields}.
1679
1680 @item modification-hooks
1681 @kindex modification-hooks @r{(overlay property)}
1682 This property's value is a list of functions to be called if any
1683 character within the overlay is changed or if text is inserted strictly
1684 within the overlay.
1685
1686 The hook functions are called both before and after each change.
1687 If the functions save the information they receive, and compare notes
1688 between calls, they can determine exactly what change has been made
1689 in the buffer text.
1690
1691 When called before a change, each function receives four arguments: the
1692 overlay, @code{nil}, and the beginning and end of the text range to be
1693 modified.
1694
1695 When called after a change, each function receives five arguments: the
1696 overlay, @code{t}, the beginning and end of the text range just
1697 modified, and the length of the pre-change text replaced by that range.
1698 (For an insertion, the pre-change length is zero; for a deletion, that
1699 length is the number of characters deleted, and the post-change
1700 beginning and end are equal.)
1701
1702 If these functions modify the buffer, they should bind
1703 @code{inhibit-modification-hooks} to @code{t} around doing so, to
1704 avoid confusing the internal mechanism that calls these hooks.
1705
1706 Text properties also support the @code{modification-hooks} property,
1707 but the details are somewhat different (@pxref{Special Properties}).
1708
1709 @item insert-in-front-hooks
1710 @kindex insert-in-front-hooks @r{(overlay property)}
1711 This property's value is a list of functions to be called before and
1712 after inserting text right at the beginning of the overlay. The calling
1713 conventions are the same as for the @code{modification-hooks} functions.
1714
1715 @item insert-behind-hooks
1716 @kindex insert-behind-hooks @r{(overlay property)}
1717 This property's value is a list of functions to be called before and
1718 after inserting text right at the end of the overlay. The calling
1719 conventions are the same as for the @code{modification-hooks} functions.
1720
1721 @item invisible
1722 @kindex invisible @r{(overlay property)}
1723 The @code{invisible} property can make the text in the overlay
1724 invisible, which means that it does not appear on the screen.
1725 @xref{Invisible Text}, for details.
1726
1727 @item intangible
1728 @kindex intangible @r{(overlay property)}
1729 The @code{intangible} property on an overlay works just like the
1730 @code{intangible} text property. It is obsolete. @xref{Special
1731 Properties}, for details.
1732
1733 @item isearch-open-invisible
1734 This property tells incremental search how to make an invisible overlay
1735 visible, permanently, if the final match overlaps it. @xref{Invisible
1736 Text}.
1737
1738 @item isearch-open-invisible-temporary
1739 This property tells incremental search how to make an invisible overlay
1740 visible, temporarily, during the search. @xref{Invisible Text}.
1741
1742 @item before-string
1743 @kindex before-string @r{(overlay property)}
1744 This property's value is a string to add to the display at the beginning
1745 of the overlay. The string does not appear in the buffer in any
1746 sense---only on the screen.
1747
1748 @item after-string
1749 @kindex after-string @r{(overlay property)}
1750 This property's value is a string to add to the display at the end of
1751 the overlay. The string does not appear in the buffer in any
1752 sense---only on the screen.
1753
1754 @item line-prefix
1755 This property specifies a display spec to prepend to each
1756 non-continuation line at display-time. @xref{Truncation}.
1757
1758 @item wrap-prefix
1759 This property specifies a display spec to prepend to each continuation
1760 line at display-time. @xref{Truncation}.
1761
1762 @item evaporate
1763 @kindex evaporate @r{(overlay property)}
1764 If this property is non-@code{nil}, the overlay is deleted automatically
1765 if it becomes empty (i.e., if its length becomes zero). If you give
1766 an empty overlay (@pxref{Managing Overlays, empty overlay}) a
1767 non-@code{nil} @code{evaporate} property, that deletes it immediately.
1768 Note that, unless an overlay has this property, it will not be deleted
1769 when the text between its starting and ending positions is deleted
1770 from the buffer.
1771
1772 @item keymap
1773 @cindex keymap of character (and overlays)
1774 @kindex keymap @r{(overlay property)}
1775 If this property is non-@code{nil}, it specifies a keymap for a portion of the
1776 text. This keymap is used when the character after point is within the
1777 overlay, and takes precedence over most other keymaps. @xref{Active Keymaps}.
1778
1779 @item local-map
1780 @kindex local-map @r{(overlay property)}
1781 The @code{local-map} property is similar to @code{keymap} but replaces the
1782 buffer's local map rather than augmenting existing keymaps. This also means it
1783 has lower precedence than minor mode keymaps.
1784 @end table
1785
1786 The @code{keymap} and @code{local-map} properties do not affect a
1787 string displayed by the @code{before-string}, @code{after-string}, or
1788 @code{display} properties. This is only relevant for mouse clicks and
1789 other mouse events that fall on the string, since point is never on
1790 the string. To bind special mouse events for the string, assign it a
1791 @code{keymap} or @code{local-map} text property. @xref{Special
1792 Properties}.
1793
1794 @node Finding Overlays
1795 @subsection Searching for Overlays
1796 @cindex searching for overlays
1797 @cindex overlays, searching for
1798
1799 @defun overlays-at pos &optional sorted
1800 This function returns a list of all the overlays that cover the character at
1801 position @var{pos} in the current buffer. If @var{sorted} is non-@code{nil},
1802 the list is in decreasing order of priority, otherwise it is in no particular
1803 order. An overlay contains position @var{pos} if it begins at or before
1804 @var{pos}, and ends after @var{pos}.
1805
1806 To illustrate usage, here is a Lisp function that returns a list of the
1807 overlays that specify property @var{prop} for the character at point:
1808
1809 @smallexample
1810 (defun find-overlays-specifying (prop)
1811 (let ((overlays (overlays-at (point)))
1812 found)
1813 (while overlays
1814 (let ((overlay (car overlays)))
1815 (if (overlay-get overlay prop)
1816 (setq found (cons overlay found))))
1817 (setq overlays (cdr overlays)))
1818 found))
1819 @end smallexample
1820 @end defun
1821
1822 @defun overlays-in beg end
1823 This function returns a list of the overlays that overlap the region
1824 @var{beg} through @var{end}. An overlay overlaps with a region if it
1825 contains one or more characters in the region; empty overlays
1826 (@pxref{Managing Overlays, empty overlay}) overlap if they are at
1827 @var{beg}, strictly between @var{beg} and @var{end}, or at @var{end}
1828 when @var{end} denotes the position at the end of the buffer.
1829 @end defun
1830
1831 @defun next-overlay-change pos
1832 This function returns the buffer position of the next beginning or end
1833 of an overlay, after @var{pos}. If there is none, it returns
1834 @code{(point-max)}.
1835 @end defun
1836
1837 @defun previous-overlay-change pos
1838 This function returns the buffer position of the previous beginning or
1839 end of an overlay, before @var{pos}. If there is none, it returns
1840 @code{(point-min)}.
1841 @end defun
1842
1843 As an example, here's a simplified (and inefficient) version of the
1844 primitive function @code{next-single-char-property-change}
1845 (@pxref{Property Search}). It searches forward from position
1846 @var{pos} for the next position where the value of a given property
1847 @code{prop}, as obtained from either overlays or text properties,
1848 changes.
1849
1850 @smallexample
1851 (defun next-single-char-property-change (position prop)
1852 (save-excursion
1853 (goto-char position)
1854 (let ((propval (get-char-property (point) prop)))
1855 (while (and (not (eobp))
1856 (eq (get-char-property (point) prop) propval))
1857 (goto-char (min (next-overlay-change (point))
1858 (next-single-property-change (point) prop)))))
1859 (point)))
1860 @end smallexample
1861
1862 @node Size of Displayed Text
1863 @section Size of Displayed Text
1864 @cindex size of text on display
1865 @cindex character width on display
1866
1867 Since not all characters have the same width, these functions let you
1868 check the width of a character. @xref{Primitive Indent}, and
1869 @ref{Screen Lines}, for related functions.
1870
1871 @defun char-width char
1872 This function returns the width in columns of the character
1873 @var{char}, if it were displayed in the current buffer (i.e., taking
1874 into account the buffer's display table, if any; @pxref{Display
1875 Tables}). The width of a tab character is usually @code{tab-width}
1876 (@pxref{Usual Display}).
1877 @end defun
1878
1879 @defun string-width string
1880 This function returns the width in columns of the string @var{string},
1881 if it were displayed in the current buffer and the selected window.
1882 @end defun
1883
1884 @defun truncate-string-to-width string width &optional start-column padding ellipsis
1885 This function returns the part of @var{string} that fits within
1886 @var{width} columns, as a new string.
1887
1888 If @var{string} does not reach @var{width}, then the result ends where
1889 @var{string} ends. If one multi-column character in @var{string}
1890 extends across the column @var{width}, that character is not included in
1891 the result. Thus, the result can fall short of @var{width} but cannot
1892 go beyond it.
1893
1894 The optional argument @var{start-column} specifies the starting column.
1895 If this is non-@code{nil}, then the first @var{start-column} columns of
1896 the string are omitted from the value. If one multi-column character in
1897 @var{string} extends across the column @var{start-column}, that
1898 character is not included.
1899
1900 The optional argument @var{padding}, if non-@code{nil}, is a padding
1901 character added at the beginning and end of the result string, to extend
1902 it to exactly @var{width} columns. The padding character is used at the
1903 end of the result if it falls short of @var{width}. It is also used at
1904 the beginning of the result if one multi-column character in
1905 @var{string} extends across the column @var{start-column}.
1906
1907 @vindex truncate-string-ellipsis
1908 If @var{ellipsis} is non-@code{nil}, it should be a string which will
1909 replace the end of @var{string} (including any padding) if it extends
1910 beyond @var{width}, unless the display width of @var{string} is equal
1911 to or less than the display width of @var{ellipsis}. If
1912 @var{ellipsis} is non-@code{nil} and not a string, it stands for
1913 the value of the variable @code{truncate-string-ellipsis}.
1914
1915 @example
1916 (truncate-string-to-width "\tab\t" 12 4)
1917 @result{} "ab"
1918 (truncate-string-to-width "\tab\t" 12 4 ?\s)
1919 @result{} " ab "
1920 @end example
1921 @end defun
1922
1923 The following function returns the size in pixels of text as if it were
1924 displayed in a given window. This function is used by
1925 @code{fit-window-to-buffer} and @code{fit-frame-to-buffer}
1926 (@pxref{Resizing Windows}) to make a window exactly as large as the text
1927 it contains.
1928
1929 @defun window-text-pixel-size &optional window from to x-limit y-limit mode-and-header-line
1930 This function returns the size of the text of @var{window}'s buffer in
1931 pixels. @var{window} must be a live window and defaults to the selected
1932 one. The return value is a cons of the maximum pixel-width of any text
1933 line and the maximum pixel-height of all text lines.
1934
1935 The optional argument @var{from}, if non-@code{nil}, specifies the first
1936 text position to consider and defaults to the minimum accessible
1937 position of the buffer. If @var{from} is @code{t}, it uses the minimum
1938 accessible position that is not a newline character. The optional
1939 argument @var{to}, if non-@code{nil}, specifies the last text position
1940 to consider and defaults to the maximum accessible position of the
1941 buffer. If @var{to} is @code{t}, it uses the maximum accessible
1942 position that is not a newline character.
1943
1944 The optional argument @var{x-limit}, if non-@code{nil}, specifies the
1945 maximum pixel-width that can be returned. @var{x-limit} @code{nil} or
1946 omitted, means to use the pixel-width of @var{window}'s body
1947 (@pxref{Window Sizes}); this is useful when the caller does not intend
1948 to change the width of @var{window}. Otherwise, the caller should
1949 specify here the maximum width @var{window}'s body may assume. Text
1950 whose x-coordinate is beyond @var{x-limit} is ignored. Since
1951 calculating the width of long lines can take some time, it's always a
1952 good idea to make this argument as small as needed; in particular, if
1953 the buffer might contain long lines that will be truncated anyway.
1954
1955 The optional argument @var{y-limit}, if non-@code{nil}, specifies the
1956 maximum pixel-height that can be returned. Text lines whose
1957 y-coordinate is beyond @var{y-limit} are ignored. Since calculating the
1958 pixel-height of a large buffer can take some time, it makes sense to
1959 specify this argument; in particular, if the caller does not know the
1960 size of the buffer.
1961
1962 The optional argument @var{mode-and-header-line} @code{nil} or omitted
1963 means to not include the height of the mode- or header-line of
1964 @var{window} in the return value. If it is either the symbol
1965 @code{mode-line} or @code{header-line}, include only the height of that
1966 line, if present, in the return value. If it is @code{t}, include the
1967 height of both, if present, in the return value.
1968 @end defun
1969
1970
1971 @node Line Height
1972 @section Line Height
1973 @cindex line height
1974 @cindex height of a line
1975
1976 The total height of each display line consists of the height of the
1977 contents of the line, plus optional additional vertical line spacing
1978 above or below the display line.
1979
1980 The height of the line contents is the maximum height of any character
1981 or image on that display line, including the final newline if there is
1982 one. (A display line that is continued doesn't include a final
1983 newline.) That is the default line height, if you do nothing to specify
1984 a greater height. (In the most common case, this equals the height of
1985 the corresponding frame's default font, see @ref{Frame Font}.)
1986
1987 There are several ways to explicitly specify a larger line height,
1988 either by specifying an absolute height for the display line, or by
1989 specifying vertical space. However, no matter what you specify, the
1990 actual line height can never be less than the default.
1991
1992 @kindex line-height @r{(text property)}
1993 A newline can have a @code{line-height} text or overlay property
1994 that controls the total height of the display line ending in that
1995 newline.
1996
1997 If the property value is @code{t}, the newline character has no
1998 effect on the displayed height of the line---the visible contents
1999 alone determine the height. The @code{line-spacing} property,
2000 described below, is also ignored in this case. This is useful for
2001 tiling small images (or image slices) without adding blank areas
2002 between the images.
2003
2004 If the property value is a list of the form @code{(@var{height}
2005 @var{total})}, that adds extra space @emph{below} the display line.
2006 First Emacs uses @var{height} as a height spec to control extra space
2007 @emph{above} the line; then it adds enough space @emph{below} the line
2008 to bring the total line height up to @var{total}. In this case, any
2009 value of @code{line-spacing} property for the newline is ignored.
2010
2011 @cindex height spec
2012 Any other kind of property value is a height spec, which translates
2013 into a number---the specified line height. There are several ways to
2014 write a height spec; here's how each of them translates into a number:
2015
2016 @table @code
2017 @item @var{integer}
2018 If the height spec is a positive integer, the height value is that integer.
2019 @item @var{float}
2020 If the height spec is a float, @var{float}, the numeric height value
2021 is @var{float} times the frame's default line height.
2022 @item (@var{face} . @var{ratio})
2023 If the height spec is a cons of the format shown, the numeric height
2024 is @var{ratio} times the height of face @var{face}. @var{ratio} can
2025 be any type of number, or @code{nil} which means a ratio of 1.
2026 If @var{face} is @code{t}, it refers to the current face.
2027 @item (nil . @var{ratio})
2028 If the height spec is a cons of the format shown, the numeric height
2029 is @var{ratio} times the height of the contents of the line.
2030 @end table
2031
2032 Thus, any valid height spec determines the height in pixels, one way
2033 or another. If the line contents' height is less than that, Emacs
2034 adds extra vertical space above the line to achieve the specified
2035 total height.
2036
2037 If you don't specify the @code{line-height} property, the line's
2038 height consists of the contents' height plus the line spacing.
2039 There are several ways to specify the line spacing for different
2040 parts of Emacs text.
2041
2042 On graphical terminals, you can specify the line spacing for all
2043 lines in a frame, using the @code{line-spacing} frame parameter
2044 (@pxref{Layout Parameters}). However, if the default value of
2045 @code{line-spacing} is non-@code{nil}, it overrides the
2046 frame's @code{line-spacing} parameter. An integer specifies the
2047 number of pixels put below lines. A floating-point number specifies
2048 the spacing relative to the frame's default line height.
2049
2050 @vindex line-spacing
2051 You can specify the line spacing for all lines in a buffer via the
2052 buffer-local @code{line-spacing} variable. An integer specifies
2053 the number of pixels put below lines. A floating-point number
2054 specifies the spacing relative to the default frame line height. This
2055 overrides line spacings specified for the frame.
2056
2057 @kindex line-spacing @r{(text property)}
2058 Finally, a newline can have a @code{line-spacing} text or overlay
2059 property that can enlarge the default frame line spacing and the
2060 buffer local @code{line-spacing} variable: if its value is larger than
2061 the buffer or frame defaults, that larger value is used instead, for
2062 the display line ending in that newline.
2063
2064 One way or another, these mechanisms specify a Lisp value for the
2065 spacing of each line. The value is a height spec, and it translates
2066 into a Lisp value as described above. However, in this case the
2067 numeric height value specifies the line spacing, rather than the line
2068 height.
2069
2070 On text terminals, the line spacing cannot be altered.
2071
2072 @node Faces
2073 @section Faces
2074 @cindex faces
2075
2076 A @dfn{face} is a collection of graphical attributes for displaying
2077 text: font, foreground color, background color, optional underlining,
2078 etc. Faces control how Emacs displays text in buffers, as well as
2079 other parts of the frame such as the mode line.
2080
2081 @cindex anonymous face
2082 One way to represent a face is as a property list of attributes,
2083 like @code{(:foreground "red" :weight bold)}. Such a list is called
2084 an @dfn{anonymous face}. For example, you can assign an anonymous
2085 face as the value of the @code{face} text property, and Emacs will
2086 display the underlying text with the specified attributes.
2087 @xref{Special Properties}.
2088
2089 @cindex face name
2090 More commonly, a face is referred to via a @dfn{face name}: a Lisp
2091 symbol associated with a set of face attributes@footnote{For backward
2092 compatibility, you can also use a string to specify a face name; that
2093 is equivalent to a Lisp symbol with the same name.}. Named faces are
2094 defined using the @code{defface} macro (@pxref{Defining Faces}).
2095 Emacs comes with several standard named faces (@pxref{Basic Faces}).
2096
2097 Many parts of Emacs required named faces, and do not accept
2098 anonymous faces. These include the functions documented in
2099 @ref{Attribute Functions}, and the variable @code{font-lock-keywords}
2100 (@pxref{Search-based Fontification}). Unless otherwise stated, we
2101 will use the term @dfn{face} to refer only to named faces.
2102
2103 @defun facep object
2104 This function returns a non-@code{nil} value if @var{object} is a
2105 named face: a Lisp symbol or string which serves as a face name.
2106 Otherwise, it returns @code{nil}.
2107 @end defun
2108
2109 @menu
2110 * Face Attributes:: What is in a face?
2111 * Defining Faces:: How to define a face.
2112 * Attribute Functions:: Functions to examine and set face attributes.
2113 * Displaying Faces:: How Emacs combines the faces specified for a character.
2114 * Face Remapping:: Remapping faces to alternative definitions.
2115 * Face Functions:: How to define and examine faces.
2116 * Auto Faces:: Hook for automatic face assignment.
2117 * Basic Faces:: Faces that are defined by default.
2118 * Font Selection:: Finding the best available font for a face.
2119 * Font Lookup:: Looking up the names of available fonts
2120 and information about them.
2121 * Fontsets:: A fontset is a collection of fonts
2122 that handle a range of character sets.
2123 * Low-Level Font:: Lisp representation for character display fonts.
2124 @end menu
2125
2126 @node Face Attributes
2127 @subsection Face Attributes
2128 @cindex face attributes
2129
2130 @dfn{Face attributes} determine the visual appearance of a face.
2131 The following table lists all the face attributes, their possible
2132 values, and their effects.
2133
2134 Apart from the values given below, each face attribute can have the
2135 value @code{unspecified}. This special value means that the face
2136 doesn't specify that attribute directly. An @code{unspecified}
2137 attribute tells Emacs to refer instead to a parent face (see the
2138 description @code{:inherit} attribute below); or, failing that, to an
2139 underlying face (@pxref{Displaying Faces}). The @code{default} face
2140 must specify all attributes.
2141
2142 Some of these attributes are meaningful only on certain kinds of
2143 displays. If your display cannot handle a certain attribute, the
2144 attribute is ignored.
2145
2146 @table @code
2147 @item :family
2148 Font family or fontset (a string). @xref{Fonts,,, emacs, The GNU
2149 Emacs Manual}, for more information about font families. The function
2150 @code{font-family-list} (see below) returns a list of available family
2151 names. @xref{Fontsets}, for information about fontsets.
2152
2153 @item :foundry
2154 The name of the @dfn{font foundry} for the font family specified by
2155 the @code{:family} attribute (a string). @xref{Fonts,,, emacs, The
2156 GNU Emacs Manual}.
2157
2158 @item :width
2159 Relative character width. This should be one of the symbols
2160 @code{ultra-condensed}, @code{extra-condensed}, @code{condensed},
2161 @code{semi-condensed}, @code{normal}, @code{semi-expanded},
2162 @code{expanded}, @code{extra-expanded}, or @code{ultra-expanded}.
2163
2164 @item :height
2165 The height of the font. In the simplest case, this is an integer in
2166 units of 1/10 point.
2167
2168 The value can also be floating point or a function, which
2169 specifies the height relative to an @dfn{underlying face}
2170 (@pxref{Displaying Faces}). A floating-point value
2171 specifies the amount by which to scale the height of the
2172 underlying face. A function value is called
2173 with one argument, the height of the underlying face, and returns the
2174 height of the new face. If the function is passed an integer
2175 argument, it must return an integer.
2176
2177 The height of the default face must be specified using an integer;
2178 floating point and function values are not allowed.
2179
2180 @item :weight
2181 Font weight---one of the symbols (from densest to faintest)
2182 @code{ultra-bold}, @code{extra-bold}, @code{bold}, @code{semi-bold},
2183 @code{normal}, @code{semi-light}, @code{light}, @code{extra-light}, or
2184 @code{ultra-light}. On text terminals which support
2185 variable-brightness text, any weight greater than normal is displayed
2186 as extra bright, and any weight less than normal is displayed as
2187 half-bright.
2188
2189 @cindex italic text
2190 @item :slant
2191 Font slant---one of the symbols @code{italic}, @code{oblique},
2192 @code{normal}, @code{reverse-italic}, or @code{reverse-oblique}. On
2193 text terminals that support variable-brightness text, slanted text is
2194 displayed as half-bright.
2195
2196 @item :foreground
2197 Foreground color, a string. The value can be a system-defined color
2198 name, or a hexadecimal color specification. @xref{Color Names}. On
2199 black-and-white displays, certain shades of gray are implemented by
2200 stipple patterns.
2201
2202 @item :distant-foreground
2203 Alternative foreground color, a string. This is like @code{:foreground}
2204 but the color is only used as a foreground when the background color is
2205 near to the foreground that would have been used. This is useful for
2206 example when marking text (i.e., the region face). If the text has a foreground
2207 that is visible with the region face, that foreground is used.
2208 If the foreground is near the region face background,
2209 @code{:distant-foreground} is used instead so the text is readable.
2210
2211 @item :background
2212 Background color, a string. The value can be a system-defined color
2213 name, or a hexadecimal color specification. @xref{Color Names}.
2214
2215 @cindex underlined text
2216 @item :underline
2217 Whether or not characters should be underlined, and in what
2218 way. The possible values of the @code{:underline} attribute are:
2219
2220 @table @asis
2221 @item @code{nil}
2222 Don't underline.
2223
2224 @item @code{t}
2225 Underline with the foreground color of the face.
2226
2227 @item @var{color}
2228 Underline in color @var{color}, a string specifying a color.
2229
2230 @item @code{(:color @var{color} :style @var{style})}
2231 @var{color} is either a string, or the symbol @code{foreground-color},
2232 meaning the foreground color of the face. Omitting the attribute
2233 @code{:color} means to use the foreground color of the face.
2234 @var{style} should be a symbol @code{line} or @code{wave}, meaning to
2235 use a straight or wavy line. Omitting the attribute @code{:style}
2236 means to use a straight line.
2237 @end table
2238
2239 @cindex overlined text
2240 @item :overline
2241 Whether or not characters should be overlined, and in what color.
2242 If the value is @code{t}, overlining uses the foreground color of the
2243 face. If the value is a string, overlining uses that color. The
2244 value @code{nil} means do not overline.
2245
2246 @cindex strike-through text
2247 @item :strike-through
2248 Whether or not characters should be strike-through, and in what
2249 color. The value is used like that of @code{:overline}.
2250
2251 @cindex 2D box
2252 @cindex 3D box
2253 @item :box
2254 Whether or not a box should be drawn around characters, its color, the
2255 width of the box lines, and 3D appearance. Here are the possible
2256 values of the @code{:box} attribute, and what they mean:
2257
2258 @table @asis
2259 @item @code{nil}
2260 Don't draw a box.
2261
2262 @item @code{t}
2263 Draw a box with lines of width 1, in the foreground color.
2264
2265 @item @var{color}
2266 Draw a box with lines of width 1, in color @var{color}.
2267
2268 @item @code{(:line-width @var{width} :color @var{color} :style @var{style})}
2269 This way you can explicitly specify all aspects of the box. The value
2270 @var{width} specifies the width of the lines to draw; it defaults to
2271 1. A negative width @var{-n} means to draw a line of width @var{n}
2272 that occupies the space of the underlying text, thus avoiding any
2273 increase in the character height or width.
2274
2275 The value @var{color} specifies the color to draw with. The default is
2276 the foreground color of the face for simple boxes, and the background
2277 color of the face for 3D boxes.
2278
2279 The value @var{style} specifies whether to draw a 3D box. If it is
2280 @code{released-button}, the box looks like a 3D button that is not being
2281 pressed. If it is @code{pressed-button}, the box looks like a 3D button
2282 that is being pressed. If it is @code{nil} or omitted, a plain 2D box
2283 is used.
2284 @end table
2285
2286 @item :inverse-video
2287 Whether or not characters should be displayed in inverse video. The
2288 value should be @code{t} (yes) or @code{nil} (no).
2289
2290 @item :stipple
2291 The background stipple, a bitmap.
2292
2293 The value can be a string; that should be the name of a file containing
2294 external-format X bitmap data. The file is found in the directories
2295 listed in the variable @code{x-bitmap-file-path}.
2296
2297 Alternatively, the value can specify the bitmap directly, with a list
2298 of the form @code{(@var{width} @var{height} @var{data})}. Here,
2299 @var{width} and @var{height} specify the size in pixels, and
2300 @var{data} is a string containing the raw bits of the bitmap, row by
2301 row. Each row occupies @math{(@var{width} + 7) / 8} consecutive bytes
2302 in the string (which should be a unibyte string for best results).
2303 This means that each row always occupies at least one whole byte.
2304
2305 If the value is @code{nil}, that means use no stipple pattern.
2306
2307 Normally you do not need to set the stipple attribute, because it is
2308 used automatically to handle certain shades of gray.
2309
2310 @item :font
2311 The font used to display the face. Its value should be a font object.
2312 @xref{Low-Level Font}, for information about font objects, font specs,
2313 and font entities.
2314
2315 When specifying this attribute using @code{set-face-attribute}
2316 (@pxref{Attribute Functions}), you may also supply a font spec, a font
2317 entity, or a string. Emacs converts such values to an appropriate
2318 font object, and stores that font object as the actual attribute
2319 value. If you specify a string, the contents of the string should be
2320 a font name (@pxref{Fonts,,, emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}); if the
2321 font name is an XLFD containing wildcards, Emacs chooses the first
2322 font matching those wildcards. Specifying this attribute also changes
2323 the values of the @code{:family}, @code{:foundry}, @code{:width},
2324 @code{:height}, @code{:weight}, and @code{:slant} attributes.
2325
2326 @cindex inheritance, for faces
2327 @item :inherit
2328 The name of a face from which to inherit attributes, or a list of face
2329 names. Attributes from inherited faces are merged into the face like
2330 an underlying face would be, with higher priority than underlying
2331 faces (@pxref{Displaying Faces}). If a list of faces is used,
2332 attributes from faces earlier in the list override those from later
2333 faces.
2334 @end table
2335
2336 @defun font-family-list &optional frame
2337 This function returns a list of available font family names. The
2338 optional argument @var{frame} specifies the frame on which the text is
2339 to be displayed; if it is @code{nil}, the selected frame is used.
2340 @end defun
2341
2342 @defopt underline-minimum-offset
2343 This variable specifies the minimum distance between the baseline and
2344 the underline, in pixels, when displaying underlined text.
2345 @end defopt
2346
2347 @defopt x-bitmap-file-path
2348 This variable specifies a list of directories for searching
2349 for bitmap files, for the @code{:stipple} attribute.
2350 @end defopt
2351
2352 @defun bitmap-spec-p object
2353 This returns @code{t} if @var{object} is a valid bitmap specification,
2354 suitable for use with @code{:stipple} (see above). It returns
2355 @code{nil} otherwise.
2356 @end defun
2357
2358 @node Defining Faces
2359 @subsection Defining Faces
2360 @cindex defining faces
2361
2362 @cindex face spec
2363 The usual way to define a face is through the @code{defface} macro.
2364 This macro associates a face name (a symbol) with a default @dfn{face
2365 spec}. A face spec is a construct which specifies what attributes a
2366 face should have on any given terminal; for example, a face spec might
2367 specify one foreground color on high-color terminals, and a different
2368 foreground color on low-color terminals.
2369
2370 People are sometimes tempted to create a variable whose value is a
2371 face name. In the vast majority of cases, this is not necessary; the
2372 usual procedure is to define a face with @code{defface}, and then use
2373 its name directly.
2374
2375 @defmac defface face spec doc [keyword value]@dots{}
2376 This macro declares @var{face} as a named face whose default face spec
2377 is given by @var{spec}. You should not quote the symbol @var{face},
2378 and it should not end in @samp{-face} (that would be redundant). The
2379 argument @var{doc} is a documentation string for the face. The
2380 additional @var{keyword} arguments have the same meanings as in
2381 @code{defgroup} and @code{defcustom} (@pxref{Common Keywords}).
2382
2383 If @var{face} already has a default face spec, this macro does
2384 nothing.
2385
2386 The default face spec determines @var{face}'s appearance when no
2387 customizations are in effect (@pxref{Customization}). If @var{face}
2388 has already been customized (via Custom themes or via customizations
2389 read from the init file), its appearance is determined by the custom
2390 face spec(s), which override the default face spec @var{spec}.
2391 However, if the customizations are subsequently removed, the
2392 appearance of @var{face} will again be determined by its default face
2393 spec.
2394
2395 As an exception, if you evaluate a @code{defface} form with
2396 @kbd{C-M-x} in Emacs Lisp mode (@code{eval-defun}), a special feature
2397 of @code{eval-defun} overrides any custom face specs on the face,
2398 causing the face to reflect exactly what the @code{defface} says.
2399
2400 The @var{spec} argument is a @dfn{face spec}, which states how the
2401 face should appear on different kinds of terminals. It should be an
2402 alist whose elements each have the form
2403
2404 @example
2405 (@var{display} . @var{plist})
2406 @end example
2407
2408 @noindent
2409 @var{display} specifies a class of terminals (see below). @var{plist}
2410 is a property list of face attributes and their values, specifying how
2411 the face appears on such terminals. For backward compatibility, you
2412 can also write an element as @code{(@var{display} @var{plist})}.
2413
2414 The @var{display} part of an element of @var{spec} determines which
2415 terminals the element matches. If more than one element of @var{spec}
2416 matches a given terminal, the first element that matches is the one
2417 used for that terminal. There are three possibilities for
2418 @var{display}:
2419
2420 @table @asis
2421 @item @code{default}
2422 This element of @var{spec} doesn't match any terminal; instead, it
2423 specifies defaults that apply to all terminals. This element, if
2424 used, must be the first element of @var{spec}. Each of the following
2425 elements can override any or all of these defaults.
2426
2427 @item @code{t}
2428 This element of @var{spec} matches all terminals. Therefore, any
2429 subsequent elements of @var{spec} are never used. Normally @code{t}
2430 is used in the last (or only) element of @var{spec}.
2431
2432 @item a list
2433 If @var{display} is a list, each element should have the form
2434 @code{(@var{characteristic} @var{value}@dots{})}. Here
2435 @var{characteristic} specifies a way of classifying terminals, and the
2436 @var{value}s are possible classifications which @var{display} should
2437 apply to. Here are the possible values of @var{characteristic}:
2438
2439 @table @code
2440 @item type
2441 The kind of window system the terminal uses---either @code{graphic}
2442 (any graphics-capable display), @code{x}, @code{pc} (for the MS-DOS
2443 console), @code{w32} (for MS Windows 9X/NT/2K/XP), or @code{tty} (a
2444 non-graphics-capable display). @xref{Window Systems, window-system}.
2445
2446 @item class
2447 What kinds of colors the terminal supports---either @code{color},
2448 @code{grayscale}, or @code{mono}.
2449
2450 @item background
2451 The kind of background---either @code{light} or @code{dark}.
2452
2453 @item min-colors
2454 An integer that represents the minimum number of colors the terminal
2455 should support. This matches a terminal if its
2456 @code{display-color-cells} value is at least the specified integer.
2457
2458 @item supports
2459 Whether or not the terminal can display the face attributes given in
2460 @var{value}@dots{} (@pxref{Face Attributes}). @xref{Display Face
2461 Attribute Testing}, for more information on exactly how this testing
2462 is done.
2463 @end table
2464
2465 If an element of @var{display} specifies more than one @var{value} for
2466 a given @var{characteristic}, any of those values is acceptable. If
2467 @var{display} has more than one element, each element should specify a
2468 different @var{characteristic}; then @emph{each} characteristic of the
2469 terminal must match one of the @var{value}s specified for it in
2470 @var{display}.
2471 @end table
2472 @end defmac
2473
2474 For example, here's the definition of the standard face
2475 @code{highlight}:
2476
2477 @example
2478 (defface highlight
2479 '((((class color) (min-colors 88) (background light))
2480 :background "darkseagreen2")
2481 (((class color) (min-colors 88) (background dark))
2482 :background "darkolivegreen")
2483 (((class color) (min-colors 16) (background light))
2484 :background "darkseagreen2")
2485 (((class color) (min-colors 16) (background dark))
2486 :background "darkolivegreen")
2487 (((class color) (min-colors 8))
2488 :background "green" :foreground "black")
2489 (t :inverse-video t))
2490 "Basic face for highlighting."
2491 :group 'basic-faces)
2492 @end example
2493
2494 Internally, Emacs stores each face's default spec in its
2495 @code{face-defface-spec} symbol property (@pxref{Symbol Properties}).
2496 The @code{saved-face} property stores any face spec saved by the user
2497 using the customization buffer; the @code{customized-face} property
2498 stores the face spec customized for the current session, but not
2499 saved; and the @code{theme-face} property stores an alist associating
2500 the active customization settings and Custom themes with the face
2501 specs for that face. The face's documentation string is stored in the
2502 @code{face-documentation} property.
2503
2504 Normally, a face is declared just once, using @code{defface}, and
2505 any further changes to its appearance are applied using the Customize
2506 framework (e.g., via the Customize user interface or via the
2507 @code{custom-set-faces} function; @pxref{Applying Customizations}), or
2508 by face remapping (@pxref{Face Remapping}). In the rare event that
2509 you need to change a face spec directly from Lisp, you can use the
2510 @code{face-spec-set} function.
2511
2512 @defun face-spec-set face spec &optional spec-type
2513 This function applies @var{spec} as a face spec for @code{face}.
2514 @var{spec} should be a face spec, as described in the above
2515 documentation for @code{defface}.
2516
2517 This function also defines @var{face} as a valid face name if it is
2518 not already one, and (re)calculates its attributes on existing frames.
2519
2520 @cindex override spec @r{(for a face)}
2521 The argument @var{spec-type} determines which spec to set. If it is
2522 @code{nil} or @code{face-override-spec}, this function sets the
2523 @dfn{override spec}, which overrides over all other face specs on
2524 @var{face}. If it is @code{customized-face} or @code{saved-face},
2525 this function sets the customized spec or the saved custom spec. If
2526 it is @code{face-defface-spec}, this function sets the default face
2527 spec (the same one set by @code{defface}). If it is @code{reset},
2528 this function clears out all customization specs and override specs
2529 from @var{face} (in this case, the value of @var{spec} is ignored).
2530 Any other value of @var{spec-type} is reserved for internal use.
2531 @end defun
2532
2533 @node Attribute Functions
2534 @subsection Face Attribute Functions
2535 @cindex face attributes, access and modification
2536
2537 This section describes functions for directly accessing and
2538 modifying the attributes of a named face.
2539
2540 @defun face-attribute face attribute &optional frame inherit
2541 This function returns the value of the @var{attribute} attribute for
2542 @var{face} on @var{frame}.
2543
2544 If @var{frame} is @code{nil}, that means the selected frame
2545 (@pxref{Input Focus}). If @var{frame} is @code{t}, this function
2546 returns the value of the specified attribute for newly-created frames
2547 (this is normally @code{unspecified}, unless you have specified some
2548 value using @code{set-face-attribute}; see below).
2549
2550 If @var{inherit} is @code{nil}, only attributes directly defined by
2551 @var{face} are considered, so the return value may be
2552 @code{unspecified}, or a relative value. If @var{inherit} is
2553 non-@code{nil}, @var{face}'s definition of @var{attribute} is merged
2554 with the faces specified by its @code{:inherit} attribute; however the
2555 return value may still be @code{unspecified} or relative. If
2556 @var{inherit} is a face or a list of faces, then the result is further
2557 merged with that face (or faces), until it becomes specified and
2558 absolute.
2559
2560 To ensure that the return value is always specified and absolute, use
2561 a value of @code{default} for @var{inherit}; this will resolve any
2562 unspecified or relative values by merging with the @code{default} face
2563 (which is always completely specified).
2564
2565 For example,
2566
2567 @example
2568 (face-attribute 'bold :weight)
2569 @result{} bold
2570 @end example
2571 @end defun
2572
2573 @c FIXME: Add an index for "relative face attribute", maybe here? --xfq
2574 @defun face-attribute-relative-p attribute value
2575 This function returns non-@code{nil} if @var{value}, when used as the
2576 value of the face attribute @var{attribute}, is relative. This means
2577 it would modify, rather than completely override, any value that comes
2578 from a subsequent face in the face list or that is inherited from
2579 another face.
2580
2581 @code{unspecified} is a relative value for all attributes. For
2582 @code{:height}, floating point and function values are also relative.
2583
2584 For example:
2585
2586 @example
2587 (face-attribute-relative-p :height 2.0)
2588 @result{} t
2589 @end example
2590 @end defun
2591
2592 @defun face-all-attributes face &optional frame
2593 This function returns an alist of attributes of @var{face}. The
2594 elements of the result are name-value pairs of the form
2595 @w{@code{(@var{attr-name} . @var{attr-value})}}. Optional argument
2596 @var{frame} specifies the frame whose definition of @var{face} to
2597 return; if omitted or @code{nil}, the returned value describes the
2598 default attributes of @var{face} for newly created frames.
2599 @end defun
2600
2601 @defun merge-face-attribute attribute value1 value2
2602 If @var{value1} is a relative value for the face attribute
2603 @var{attribute}, returns it merged with the underlying value
2604 @var{value2}; otherwise, if @var{value1} is an absolute value for the
2605 face attribute @var{attribute}, returns @var{value1} unchanged.
2606 @end defun
2607
2608 Normally, Emacs uses the face specs of each face to automatically
2609 calculate its attributes on each frame (@pxref{Defining Faces}). The
2610 function @code{set-face-attribute} can override this calculation by
2611 directly assigning attributes to a face, either on a specific frame or
2612 for all frames. This function is mostly intended for internal usage.
2613
2614 @defun set-face-attribute face frame &rest arguments
2615 This function sets one or more attributes of @var{face} for
2616 @var{frame}. The attributes specifies in this way override the face
2617 spec(s) belonging to @var{face}.
2618
2619 The extra arguments @var{arguments} specify the attributes to set, and
2620 the values for them. They should consist of alternating attribute
2621 names (such as @code{:family} or @code{:underline}) and values. Thus,
2622
2623 @example
2624 (set-face-attribute 'foo nil :weight 'bold :slant 'italic)
2625 @end example
2626
2627 @noindent
2628 sets the attribute @code{:weight} to @code{bold} and the attribute
2629 @code{:slant} to @code{italic}.
2630
2631
2632 If @var{frame} is @code{t}, this function sets the default attributes
2633 for newly created frames. If @var{frame} is @code{nil}, this function
2634 sets the attributes for all existing frames, as well as for newly
2635 created frames.
2636 @end defun
2637
2638 The following commands and functions mostly provide compatibility
2639 with old versions of Emacs. They work by calling
2640 @code{set-face-attribute}. Values of @code{t} and @code{nil} for
2641 their @var{frame} argument are handled just like
2642 @code{set-face-attribute} and @code{face-attribute}. The commands
2643 read their arguments using the minibuffer, if called interactively.
2644
2645 @deffn Command set-face-foreground face color &optional frame
2646 @deffnx Command set-face-background face color &optional frame
2647 These set the @code{:foreground} attribute (or @code{:background}
2648 attribute, respectively) of @var{face} to @var{color}.
2649 @end deffn
2650
2651 @deffn Command set-face-stipple face pattern &optional frame
2652 This sets the @code{:stipple} attribute of @var{face} to
2653 @var{pattern}.
2654 @end deffn
2655
2656 @deffn Command set-face-font face font &optional frame
2657 This sets the @code{:font} attribute of @var{face} to @var{font}.
2658 @end deffn
2659
2660 @defun set-face-bold face bold-p &optional frame
2661 This sets the @code{:weight} attribute of @var{face} to @var{normal}
2662 if @var{bold-p} is @code{nil}, and to @var{bold} otherwise.
2663 @end defun
2664
2665 @defun set-face-italic face italic-p &optional frame
2666 This sets the @code{:slant} attribute of @var{face} to @var{normal} if
2667 @var{italic-p} is @code{nil}, and to @var{italic} otherwise.
2668 @end defun
2669
2670 @defun set-face-underline face underline &optional frame
2671 This sets the @code{:underline} attribute of @var{face} to
2672 @var{underline}.
2673 @end defun
2674
2675 @defun set-face-inverse-video face inverse-video-p &optional frame
2676 This sets the @code{:inverse-video} attribute of @var{face} to
2677 @var{inverse-video-p}.
2678 @end defun
2679
2680 @deffn Command invert-face face &optional frame
2681 This swaps the foreground and background colors of face @var{face}.
2682 @end deffn
2683
2684 The following functions examine the attributes of a face. They
2685 mostly provide compatibility with old versions of Emacs. If you don't
2686 specify @var{frame}, they refer to the selected frame; @code{t} refers
2687 to the default data for new frames. They return @code{unspecified} if
2688 the face doesn't define any value for that attribute. If
2689 @var{inherit} is @code{nil}, only an attribute directly defined by the
2690 face is returned. If @var{inherit} is non-@code{nil}, any faces
2691 specified by its @code{:inherit} attribute are considered as well, and
2692 if @var{inherit} is a face or a list of faces, then they are also
2693 considered, until a specified attribute is found. To ensure that the
2694 return value is always specified, use a value of @code{default} for
2695 @var{inherit}.
2696
2697 @defun face-font face &optional frame character
2698 This function returns the name of the font of face @var{face}.
2699
2700 If the optional argument @var{frame} is specified, it returns the name
2701 of the font of @var{face} for that frame. If @var{frame} is omitted or
2702 @code{nil}, the selected frame is used. And, in this case, if the
2703 optional third argument @var{character} is supplied, it returns the font
2704 name used for @var{character}.
2705 @end defun
2706
2707 @defun face-foreground face &optional frame inherit
2708 @defunx face-background face &optional frame inherit
2709 These functions return the foreground color (or background color,
2710 respectively) of face @var{face}, as a string.
2711 @end defun
2712
2713 @defun face-stipple face &optional frame inherit
2714 This function returns the name of the background stipple pattern of face
2715 @var{face}, or @code{nil} if it doesn't have one.
2716 @end defun
2717
2718 @defun face-bold-p face &optional frame inherit
2719 This function returns a non-@code{nil} value if the @code{:weight}
2720 attribute of @var{face} is bolder than normal (i.e., one of
2721 @code{semi-bold}, @code{bold}, @code{extra-bold}, or
2722 @code{ultra-bold}). Otherwise, it returns @code{nil}.
2723 @end defun
2724
2725 @defun face-italic-p face &optional frame inherit
2726 This function returns a non-@code{nil} value if the @code{:slant}
2727 attribute of @var{face} is @code{italic} or @code{oblique}, and
2728 @code{nil} otherwise.
2729 @end defun
2730
2731 @defun face-underline-p face &optional frame inherit
2732 This function returns non-@code{nil} if face @var{face} specifies
2733 a non-@code{nil} @code{:underline} attribute.
2734 @end defun
2735
2736 @defun face-inverse-video-p face &optional frame inherit
2737 This function returns non-@code{nil} if face @var{face} specifies
2738 a non-@code{nil} @code{:inverse-video} attribute.
2739 @end defun
2740
2741 @node Displaying Faces
2742 @subsection Displaying Faces
2743 @cindex displaying faces
2744 @cindex face merging
2745
2746 When Emacs displays a given piece of text, the visual appearance of
2747 the text may be determined by faces drawn from different sources. If
2748 these various sources together specify more than one face for a
2749 particular character, Emacs merges the attributes of the various
2750 faces. Here is the order in which Emacs merges the faces, from
2751 highest to lowest priority:
2752
2753 @itemize @bullet
2754 @item
2755 If the text consists of a special glyph, the glyph can specify a
2756 particular face. @xref{Glyphs}.
2757
2758 @item
2759 If the text lies within an active region, Emacs highlights it using
2760 the @code{region} face. @xref{Standard Faces,,, emacs, The GNU Emacs
2761 Manual}.
2762
2763 @item
2764 If the text lies within an overlay with a non-@code{nil} @code{face}
2765 property, Emacs applies the face(s) specified by that property. If
2766 the overlay has a @code{mouse-face} property and the mouse is near
2767 enough to the overlay, Emacs applies the face or face attributes
2768 specified by the @code{mouse-face} property instead. @xref{Overlay
2769 Properties}.
2770
2771 When multiple overlays cover one character, an overlay with higher
2772 priority overrides those with lower priority. @xref{Overlays}.
2773
2774 @item
2775 If the text contains a @code{face} or @code{mouse-face} property,
2776 Emacs applies the specified faces and face attributes. @xref{Special
2777 Properties}. (This is how Font Lock mode faces are applied.
2778 @xref{Font Lock Mode}.)
2779
2780 @item
2781 If the text lies within the mode line of the selected window, Emacs
2782 applies the @code{mode-line} face. For the mode line of a
2783 non-selected window, Emacs applies the @code{mode-line-inactive} face.
2784 For a header line, Emacs applies the @code{header-line} face.
2785
2786 @item
2787 If any given attribute has not been specified during the preceding
2788 steps, Emacs applies the attribute of the @code{default} face.
2789 @end itemize
2790
2791 At each stage, if a face has a valid @code{:inherit} attribute,
2792 Emacs treats any attribute with an @code{unspecified} value as having
2793 the corresponding value drawn from the parent face(s). @pxref{Face
2794 Attributes}. Note that the parent face(s) may also leave the
2795 attribute unspecified; in that case, the attribute remains unspecified
2796 at the next level of face merging.
2797
2798 @node Face Remapping
2799 @subsection Face Remapping
2800 @cindex face remapping
2801
2802 The variable @code{face-remapping-alist} is used for buffer-local or
2803 global changes in the appearance of a face. For instance, it is used
2804 to implement the @code{text-scale-adjust} command (@pxref{Text
2805 Scale,,, emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}).
2806
2807 @defvar face-remapping-alist
2808 The value of this variable is an alist whose elements have the form
2809 @code{(@var{face} . @var{remapping})}. This causes Emacs to display
2810 any text having the face @var{face} with @var{remapping}, rather than
2811 the ordinary definition of @var{face}.
2812
2813 @var{remapping} may be any face spec suitable for a @code{face} text
2814 property: either a face (i.e., a face name or a property list of
2815 attribute/value pairs), or a list of faces. For details, see the
2816 description of the @code{face} text property in @ref{Special
2817 Properties}. @var{remapping} serves as the complete specification for
2818 the remapped face---it replaces the normal definition of @var{face},
2819 instead of modifying it.
2820
2821 If @code{face-remapping-alist} is buffer-local, its local value takes
2822 effect only within that buffer.
2823
2824 Note: face remapping is non-recursive. If @var{remapping} references
2825 the same face name @var{face}, either directly or via the
2826 @code{:inherit} attribute of some other face in @var{remapping}, that
2827 reference uses the normal definition of @var{face}. For instance, if
2828 the @code{mode-line} face is remapped using this entry in
2829 @code{face-remapping-alist}:
2830
2831 @example
2832 (mode-line italic mode-line)
2833 @end example
2834
2835 @noindent
2836 then the new definition of the @code{mode-line} face inherits from the
2837 @code{italic} face, and the @emph{normal} (non-remapped) definition of
2838 @code{mode-line} face.
2839 @end defvar
2840
2841 @cindex relative remapping, faces
2842 @cindex base remapping, faces
2843 The following functions implement a higher-level interface to
2844 @code{face-remapping-alist}. Most Lisp code should use these
2845 functions instead of setting @code{face-remapping-alist} directly, to
2846 avoid trampling on remappings applied elsewhere. These functions are
2847 intended for buffer-local remappings, so they all make
2848 @code{face-remapping-alist} buffer-local as a side-effect. They manage
2849 @code{face-remapping-alist} entries of the form
2850
2851 @example
2852 (@var{face} @var{relative-spec-1} @var{relative-spec-2} @var{...} @var{base-spec})
2853 @end example
2854
2855 @noindent
2856 where, as explained above, each of the @var{relative-spec-N} and
2857 @var{base-spec} is either a face name, or a property list of
2858 attribute/value pairs. Each of the @dfn{relative remapping} entries,
2859 @var{relative-spec-N}, is managed by the
2860 @code{face-remap-add-relative} and @code{face-remap-remove-relative}
2861 functions; these are intended for simple modifications like changing
2862 the text size. The @dfn{base remapping} entry, @var{base-spec}, has
2863 the lowest priority and is managed by the @code{face-remap-set-base}
2864 and @code{face-remap-reset-base} functions; it is intended for major
2865 modes to remap faces in the buffers they control.
2866
2867 @defun face-remap-add-relative face &rest specs
2868 This function adds the face spec in @var{specs} as relative
2869 remappings for face @var{face} in the current buffer. The remaining
2870 arguments, @var{specs}, should form either a list of face names, or a
2871 property list of attribute/value pairs.
2872
2873 The return value is a Lisp object that serves as a cookie; you can
2874 pass this object as an argument to @code{face-remap-remove-relative}
2875 if you need to remove the remapping later.
2876
2877 @example
2878 ;; Remap the 'escape-glyph' face into a combination
2879 ;; of the 'highlight' and 'italic' faces:
2880 (face-remap-add-relative 'escape-glyph 'highlight 'italic)
2881
2882 ;; Increase the size of the 'default' face by 50%:
2883 (face-remap-add-relative 'default :height 1.5)
2884 @end example
2885 @end defun
2886
2887 @defun face-remap-remove-relative cookie
2888 This function removes a relative remapping previously added by
2889 @code{face-remap-add-relative}. @var{cookie} should be the Lisp
2890 object returned by @code{face-remap-add-relative} when the remapping
2891 was added.
2892 @end defun
2893
2894 @defun face-remap-set-base face &rest specs
2895 This function sets the base remapping of @var{face} in the current
2896 buffer to @var{specs}. If @var{specs} is empty, the default base
2897 remapping is restored, similar to calling @code{face-remap-reset-base}
2898 (see below); note that this is different from @var{specs} containing a
2899 single value @code{nil}, which has the opposite result (the global
2900 definition of @var{face} is ignored).
2901
2902 This overwrites the default @var{base-spec}, which inherits the global
2903 face definition, so it is up to the caller to add such inheritance if
2904 so desired.
2905 @end defun
2906
2907 @defun face-remap-reset-base face
2908 This function sets the base remapping of @var{face} to its default
2909 value, which inherits from @var{face}'s global definition.
2910 @end defun
2911
2912 @node Face Functions
2913 @subsection Functions for Working with Faces
2914
2915 Here are additional functions for creating and working with faces.
2916
2917 @defun face-list
2918 This function returns a list of all defined face names.
2919 @end defun
2920
2921 @defun face-id face
2922 This function returns the @dfn{face number} of face @var{face}. This
2923 is a number that uniquely identifies a face at low levels within
2924 Emacs. It is seldom necessary to refer to a face by its face number.
2925 @end defun
2926
2927 @defun face-documentation face
2928 This function returns the documentation string of face @var{face}, or
2929 @code{nil} if none was specified for it.
2930 @end defun
2931
2932 @defun face-equal face1 face2 &optional frame
2933 This returns @code{t} if the faces @var{face1} and @var{face2} have the
2934 same attributes for display.
2935 @end defun
2936
2937 @defun face-differs-from-default-p face &optional frame
2938 This returns non-@code{nil} if the face @var{face} displays
2939 differently from the default face.
2940 @end defun
2941
2942 @cindex face alias
2943 @cindex alias, for faces
2944 A @dfn{face alias} provides an equivalent name for a face. You can
2945 define a face alias by giving the alias symbol the @code{face-alias}
2946 property, with a value of the target face name. The following example
2947 makes @code{modeline} an alias for the @code{mode-line} face.
2948
2949 @example
2950 (put 'modeline 'face-alias 'mode-line)
2951 @end example
2952
2953 @defmac define-obsolete-face-alias obsolete-face current-face when
2954 This macro defines @code{obsolete-face} as an alias for
2955 @var{current-face}, and also marks it as obsolete, indicating that it
2956 may be removed in future. @var{when} should be a string indicating
2957 when @code{obsolete-face} was made obsolete (usually a version number
2958 string).
2959 @end defmac
2960
2961 @node Auto Faces
2962 @subsection Automatic Face Assignment
2963 @cindex automatic face assignment
2964 @cindex faces, automatic choice
2965
2966 This hook is used for automatically assigning faces to text in the
2967 buffer. It is part of the implementation of Jit-Lock mode, used by
2968 Font-Lock.
2969
2970 @defvar fontification-functions
2971 This variable holds a list of functions that are called by Emacs
2972 redisplay as needed, just before doing redisplay. They are called even
2973 when Font Lock Mode isn't enabled. When Font Lock Mode is enabled, this
2974 variable usually holds just one function, @code{jit-lock-function}.
2975
2976 The functions are called in the order listed, with one argument, a
2977 buffer position @var{pos}. Collectively they should attempt to assign
2978 faces to the text in the current buffer starting at @var{pos}.
2979
2980 The functions should record the faces they assign by setting the
2981 @code{face} property. They should also add a non-@code{nil}
2982 @code{fontified} property to all the text they have assigned faces to.
2983 That property tells redisplay that faces have been assigned to that text
2984 already.
2985
2986 It is probably a good idea for the functions to do nothing if the
2987 character after @var{pos} already has a non-@code{nil} @code{fontified}
2988 property, but this is not required. If one function overrides the
2989 assignments made by a previous one, the properties after the last
2990 function finishes are the ones that really matter.
2991
2992 For efficiency, we recommend writing these functions so that they
2993 usually assign faces to around 400 to 600 characters at each call.
2994 @end defvar
2995
2996 @node Basic Faces
2997 @subsection Basic Faces
2998 @cindex basic faces
2999
3000 If your Emacs Lisp program needs to assign some faces to text, it is
3001 often a good idea to use certain existing faces or inherit from them,
3002 rather than defining entirely new faces. This way, if other users
3003 have customized the basic faces to give Emacs a certain look, your
3004 program will fit in without additional customization.
3005
3006 Some of the basic faces defined in Emacs are listed below. In
3007 addition to these, you might want to make use of the Font Lock faces
3008 for syntactic highlighting, if highlighting is not already handled by
3009 Font Lock mode, or if some Font Lock faces are not in use.
3010 @xref{Faces for Font Lock}.
3011
3012 @table @code
3013 @item default
3014 The default face, whose attributes are all specified. All other faces
3015 implicitly inherit from it: any unspecified attribute defaults to the
3016 attribute on this face (@pxref{Face Attributes}).
3017
3018 @item bold
3019 @itemx italic
3020 @itemx bold-italic
3021 @itemx underline
3022 @itemx fixed-pitch
3023 @itemx variable-pitch
3024 These have the attributes indicated by their names (e.g., @code{bold}
3025 has a bold @code{:weight} attribute), with all other attributes
3026 unspecified (and so given by @code{default}).
3027
3028 @item shadow
3029 For dimmed-out text. For example, it is used for the ignored
3030 part of a filename in the minibuffer (@pxref{Minibuffer File,,
3031 Minibuffers for File Names, emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}).
3032
3033 @item link
3034 @itemx link-visited
3035 For clickable text buttons that send the user to a different
3036 buffer or location.
3037
3038 @item highlight
3039 For stretches of text that should temporarily stand out. For example,
3040 it is commonly assigned to the @code{mouse-face} property for cursor
3041 highlighting (@pxref{Special Properties}).
3042
3043 @item match
3044 @itemx isearch
3045 @itemx lazy-highlight
3046 For text matching (respectively) permanent search matches, interactive
3047 search matches, and lazy highlighting other matches than the current
3048 interactive one.
3049
3050 @item error
3051 @itemx warning
3052 @itemx success
3053 For text concerning errors, warnings, or successes. For example,
3054 these are used for messages in @file{*Compilation*} buffers.
3055 @end table
3056
3057 @node Font Selection
3058 @subsection Font Selection
3059 @cindex font selection
3060 @cindex selecting a font
3061
3062 Before Emacs can draw a character on a graphical display, it must
3063 select a @dfn{font} for that character@footnote{In this context, the
3064 term @dfn{font} has nothing to do with Font Lock (@pxref{Font Lock
3065 Mode}).}. @xref{Fonts,,, emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}. Normally,
3066 Emacs automatically chooses a font based on the faces assigned to that
3067 character---specifically, the face attributes @code{:family},
3068 @code{:weight}, @code{:slant}, and @code{:width} (@pxref{Face
3069 Attributes}). The choice of font also depends on the character to be
3070 displayed; some fonts can only display a limited set of characters.
3071 If no available font exactly fits the requirements, Emacs looks for
3072 the @dfn{closest matching font}. The variables in this section
3073 control how Emacs makes this selection.
3074
3075 @defopt face-font-family-alternatives
3076 If a given family is specified but does not exist, this variable
3077 specifies alternative font families to try. Each element should have
3078 this form:
3079
3080 @example
3081 (@var{family} @var{alternate-families}@dots{})
3082 @end example
3083
3084 If @var{family} is specified but not available, Emacs will try the other
3085 families given in @var{alternate-families}, one by one, until it finds a
3086 family that does exist.
3087 @end defopt
3088
3089 @defopt face-font-selection-order
3090 If there is no font that exactly matches all desired face attributes
3091 (@code{:width}, @code{:height}, @code{:weight}, and @code{:slant}),
3092 this variable specifies the order in which these attributes should be
3093 considered when selecting the closest matching font. The value should
3094 be a list containing those four attribute symbols, in order of
3095 decreasing importance. The default is @code{(:width :height :weight
3096 :slant)}.
3097
3098 Font selection first finds the best available matches for the first
3099 attribute in the list; then, among the fonts which are best in that
3100 way, it searches for the best matches in the second attribute, and so
3101 on.
3102
3103 The attributes @code{:weight} and @code{:width} have symbolic values in
3104 a range centered around @code{normal}. Matches that are more extreme
3105 (farther from @code{normal}) are somewhat preferred to matches that are
3106 less extreme (closer to @code{normal}); this is designed to ensure that
3107 non-normal faces contrast with normal ones, whenever possible.
3108
3109 One example of a case where this variable makes a difference is when the
3110 default font has no italic equivalent. With the default ordering, the
3111 @code{italic} face will use a non-italic font that is similar to the
3112 default one. But if you put @code{:slant} before @code{:height}, the
3113 @code{italic} face will use an italic font, even if its height is not
3114 quite right.
3115 @end defopt
3116
3117 @defopt face-font-registry-alternatives
3118 This variable lets you specify alternative font registries to try, if a
3119 given registry is specified and doesn't exist. Each element should have
3120 this form:
3121
3122 @example
3123 (@var{registry} @var{alternate-registries}@dots{})
3124 @end example
3125
3126 If @var{registry} is specified but not available, Emacs will try the
3127 other registries given in @var{alternate-registries}, one by one,
3128 until it finds a registry that does exist.
3129 @end defopt
3130
3131 @cindex scalable fonts
3132 Emacs can make use of scalable fonts, but by default it does not use
3133 them.
3134
3135 @defopt scalable-fonts-allowed
3136 This variable controls which scalable fonts to use. A value of
3137 @code{nil}, the default, means do not use scalable fonts. @code{t}
3138 means to use any scalable font that seems appropriate for the text.
3139
3140 Otherwise, the value must be a list of regular expressions. Then a
3141 scalable font is enabled for use if its name matches any regular
3142 expression in the list. For example,
3143
3144 @example
3145 (setq scalable-fonts-allowed '("iso10646-1$"))
3146 @end example
3147
3148 @noindent
3149 allows the use of scalable fonts with registry @code{iso10646-1}.
3150 @end defopt
3151
3152 @defvar face-font-rescale-alist
3153 This variable specifies scaling for certain faces. Its value should
3154 be a list of elements of the form
3155
3156 @example
3157 (@var{fontname-regexp} . @var{scale-factor})
3158 @end example
3159
3160 If @var{fontname-regexp} matches the font name that is about to be
3161 used, this says to choose a larger similar font according to the
3162 factor @var{scale-factor}. You would use this feature to normalize
3163 the font size if certain fonts are bigger or smaller than their
3164 nominal heights and widths would suggest.
3165 @end defvar
3166
3167 @node Font Lookup
3168 @subsection Looking Up Fonts
3169 @cindex font lookup
3170 @cindex looking up fonts
3171
3172 @defun x-list-fonts name &optional reference-face frame maximum width
3173 This function returns a list of available font names that match
3174 @var{name}. @var{name} should be a string containing a font name in
3175 either the Fontconfig, GTK, or XLFD format (@pxref{Fonts,,, emacs, The
3176 GNU Emacs Manual}). Within an XLFD string, wildcard characters may be
3177 used: the @samp{*} character matches any substring, and the @samp{?}
3178 character matches any single character. Case is ignored when matching
3179 font names.
3180
3181 If the optional arguments @var{reference-face} and @var{frame} are
3182 specified, the returned list includes only fonts that are the same
3183 size as @var{reference-face} (a face name) currently is on the frame
3184 @var{frame}.
3185
3186 The optional argument @var{maximum} sets a limit on how many fonts to
3187 return. If it is non-@code{nil}, then the return value is truncated
3188 after the first @var{maximum} matching fonts. Specifying a small
3189 value for @var{maximum} can make this function much faster, in cases
3190 where many fonts match the pattern.
3191
3192 The optional argument @var{width} specifies a desired font width. If
3193 it is non-@code{nil}, the function only returns those fonts whose
3194 characters are (on average) @var{width} times as wide as
3195 @var{reference-face}.
3196 @end defun
3197
3198 @defun x-family-fonts &optional family frame
3199 This function returns a list describing the available fonts for family
3200 @var{family} on @var{frame}. If @var{family} is omitted or @code{nil},
3201 this list applies to all families, and therefore, it contains all
3202 available fonts. Otherwise, @var{family} must be a string; it may
3203 contain the wildcards @samp{?} and @samp{*}.
3204
3205 The list describes the display that @var{frame} is on; if @var{frame} is
3206 omitted or @code{nil}, it applies to the selected frame's display
3207 (@pxref{Input Focus}).
3208
3209 Each element in the list is a vector of the following form:
3210
3211 @example
3212 [@var{family} @var{width} @var{point-size} @var{weight} @var{slant}
3213 @var{fixed-p} @var{full} @var{registry-and-encoding}]
3214 @end example
3215
3216 The first five elements correspond to face attributes; if you
3217 specify these attributes for a face, it will use this font.
3218
3219 The last three elements give additional information about the font.
3220 @var{fixed-p} is non-@code{nil} if the font is fixed-pitch.
3221 @var{full} is the full name of the font, and
3222 @var{registry-and-encoding} is a string giving the registry and
3223 encoding of the font.
3224 @end defun
3225
3226 @node Fontsets
3227 @subsection Fontsets
3228 @cindex fontset
3229
3230 A @dfn{fontset} is a list of fonts, each assigned to a range of
3231 character codes. An individual font cannot display the whole range of
3232 characters that Emacs supports, but a fontset can. Fontsets have names,
3233 just as fonts do, and you can use a fontset name in place of a font name
3234 when you specify the font for a frame or a face. Here is
3235 information about defining a fontset under Lisp program control.
3236
3237 @defun create-fontset-from-fontset-spec fontset-spec &optional style-variant-p noerror
3238 This function defines a new fontset according to the specification
3239 string @var{fontset-spec}. The string should have this format:
3240
3241 @smallexample
3242 @var{fontpattern}, @r{[}@var{charset}:@var{font}@r{]@dots{}}
3243 @end smallexample
3244
3245 @noindent
3246 Whitespace characters before and after the commas are ignored.
3247
3248 The first part of the string, @var{fontpattern}, should have the form of
3249 a standard X font name, except that the last two fields should be
3250 @samp{fontset-@var{alias}}.
3251
3252 The new fontset has two names, one long and one short. The long name is
3253 @var{fontpattern} in its entirety. The short name is
3254 @samp{fontset-@var{alias}}. You can refer to the fontset by either
3255 name. If a fontset with the same name already exists, an error is
3256 signaled, unless @var{noerror} is non-@code{nil}, in which case this
3257 function does nothing.
3258
3259 If optional argument @var{style-variant-p} is non-@code{nil}, that says
3260 to create bold, italic and bold-italic variants of the fontset as well.
3261 These variant fontsets do not have a short name, only a long one, which
3262 is made by altering @var{fontpattern} to indicate the bold and/or italic
3263 status.
3264
3265 The specification string also says which fonts to use in the fontset.
3266 See below for the details.
3267 @end defun
3268
3269 The construct @samp{@var{charset}:@var{font}} specifies which font to
3270 use (in this fontset) for one particular character set. Here,
3271 @var{charset} is the name of a character set, and @var{font} is the font
3272 to use for that character set. You can use this construct any number of
3273 times in the specification string.
3274
3275 For the remaining character sets, those that you don't specify
3276 explicitly, Emacs chooses a font based on @var{fontpattern}: it replaces
3277 @samp{fontset-@var{alias}} with a value that names one character set.
3278 For the @acronym{ASCII} character set, @samp{fontset-@var{alias}} is replaced
3279 with @samp{ISO8859-1}.
3280
3281 In addition, when several consecutive fields are wildcards, Emacs
3282 collapses them into a single wildcard. This is to prevent use of
3283 auto-scaled fonts. Fonts made by scaling larger fonts are not usable
3284 for editing, and scaling a smaller font is not useful because it is
3285 better to use the smaller font in its own size, which Emacs does.
3286
3287 Thus if @var{fontpattern} is this,
3288
3289 @example
3290 -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-*-*-*-*-fontset-24
3291 @end example
3292
3293 @noindent
3294 the font specification for @acronym{ASCII} characters would be this:
3295
3296 @example
3297 -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-ISO8859-1
3298 @end example
3299
3300 @noindent
3301 and the font specification for Chinese GB2312 characters would be this:
3302
3303 @example
3304 -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-gb2312*-*
3305 @end example
3306
3307 You may not have any Chinese font matching the above font
3308 specification. Most X distributions include only Chinese fonts that
3309 have @samp{song ti} or @samp{fangsong ti} in the @var{family} field. In
3310 such a case, @samp{Fontset-@var{n}} can be specified as below:
3311
3312 @smallexample
3313 Emacs.Fontset-0: -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-*-*-*-*-fontset-24,\
3314 chinese-gb2312:-*-*-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-gb2312*-*
3315 @end smallexample
3316
3317 @noindent
3318 Then, the font specifications for all but Chinese GB2312 characters have
3319 @samp{fixed} in the @var{family} field, and the font specification for
3320 Chinese GB2312 characters has a wild card @samp{*} in the @var{family}
3321 field.
3322
3323 @defun set-fontset-font name character font-spec &optional frame add
3324 This function modifies the existing fontset @var{name} to use the font
3325 matching with @var{font-spec} for the specified @var{character}.
3326
3327 If @var{name} is @code{nil}, this function modifies the fontset of the
3328 selected frame or that of @var{frame} if @var{frame} is not
3329 @code{nil}.
3330
3331 If @var{name} is @code{t}, this function modifies the default
3332 fontset, whose short name is @samp{fontset-default}.
3333
3334 In addition to specifying a single codepoint, @var{character} may be a
3335 cons @code{(@var{from} . @var{to})}, where @var{from} and @var{to} are
3336 character codepoints. In that case, use @var{font-spec} for all the
3337 characters in the range @var{from} and @var{to} (inclusive).
3338
3339 @var{character} may be a charset. In that case, use
3340 @var{font-spec} for all character in the charsets.
3341
3342 @var{character} may be a script name. In that case, use
3343 @var{font-spec} for all character in the charsets.
3344
3345 @var{font-spec} may be a font-spec object created by the function
3346 @code{font-spec} (@pxref{Low-Level Font}).
3347
3348 @var{font-spec} may be a cons; @code{(@var{family} . @var{registry})},
3349 where @var{family} is a family name of a font (possibly including a
3350 foundry name at the head), @var{registry} is a registry name of a font
3351 (possibly including an encoding name at the tail).
3352
3353 @var{font-spec} may be a font name string.
3354
3355 @var{font-spec} may be @code{nil}, which explicitly specifies that
3356 there's no font for the specified @var{character}. This is useful,
3357 for example, to avoid expensive system-wide search for fonts for
3358 characters that have no glyphs, like those from the Unicode Private
3359 Use Area (PUA).
3360
3361 The optional argument @var{add}, if non-@code{nil}, specifies how to
3362 add @var{font-spec} to the font specifications previously set. If it
3363 is @code{prepend}, @var{font-spec} is prepended. If it is
3364 @code{append}, @var{font-spec} is appended. By default,
3365 @var{font-spec} overrides the previous settings.
3366
3367 For instance, this changes the default fontset to use a font of which
3368 family name is @samp{Kochi Gothic} for all characters belonging to
3369 the charset @code{japanese-jisx0208}.
3370
3371 @smallexample
3372 (set-fontset-font t 'japanese-jisx0208
3373 (font-spec :family "Kochi Gothic"))
3374 @end smallexample
3375 @end defun
3376
3377 @defun char-displayable-p char
3378 This function returns @code{t} if Emacs ought to be able to display
3379 @var{char}. More precisely, if the selected frame's fontset has a
3380 font to display the character set that @var{char} belongs to.
3381
3382 Fontsets can specify a font on a per-character basis; when the fontset
3383 does that, this function's value may not be accurate.
3384 @end defun
3385
3386 @node Low-Level Font
3387 @subsection Low-Level Font Representation
3388 @cindex font property
3389
3390 Normally, it is not necessary to manipulate fonts directly. In case
3391 you need to do so, this section explains how.
3392
3393 In Emacs Lisp, fonts are represented using three different Lisp
3394 object types: @dfn{font objects}, @dfn{font specs}, and @dfn{font
3395 entities}.
3396
3397 @defun fontp object &optional type
3398 Return @code{t} if @var{object} is a font object, font spec, or font
3399 entity. Otherwise, return @code{nil}.
3400
3401 The optional argument @var{type}, if non-@code{nil}, determines the
3402 exact type of Lisp object to check for. In that case, @var{type}
3403 should be one of @code{font-object}, @code{font-spec}, or
3404 @code{font-entity}.
3405 @end defun
3406
3407 @cindex font object
3408 A font object is a Lisp object that represents a font that Emacs has
3409 @dfn{opened}. Font objects cannot be modified in Lisp, but they can
3410 be inspected.
3411
3412 @defun font-at position &optional window string
3413 Return the font object that is being used to display the character at
3414 position @var{position} in the window @var{window}. If @var{window}
3415 is @code{nil}, it defaults to the selected window. If @var{string} is
3416 @code{nil}, @var{position} specifies a position in the current buffer;
3417 otherwise, @var{string} should be a string, and @var{position}
3418 specifies a position in that string.
3419 @end defun
3420
3421 @cindex font spec
3422 A font spec is a Lisp object that contains a set of specifications
3423 that can be used to find a font. More than one font may match the
3424 specifications in a font spec.
3425
3426 @defun font-spec &rest arguments
3427 Return a new font spec using the specifications in @var{arguments},
3428 which should come in @code{property}-@code{value} pairs. The possible
3429 specifications are as follows:
3430
3431 @table @code
3432 @item :name
3433 The font name (a string), in either XLFD, Fontconfig, or GTK format.
3434 @xref{Fonts,,, emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}.
3435
3436 @item :family
3437 @itemx :foundry
3438 @itemx :weight
3439 @itemx :slant
3440 @itemx :width
3441 These have the same meanings as the face attributes of the same name.
3442 @xref{Face Attributes}.
3443
3444 @item :size
3445 The font size---either a non-negative integer that specifies the pixel
3446 size, or a floating-point number that specifies the point size.
3447
3448 @item :adstyle
3449 Additional typographic style information for the font, such as
3450 @samp{sans}. The value should be a string or a symbol.
3451
3452 @cindex font registry
3453 @item :registry
3454 The charset registry and encoding of the font, such as
3455 @samp{iso8859-1}. The value should be a string or a symbol.
3456
3457 @item :script
3458 The script that the font must support (a symbol).
3459
3460 @item :lang
3461 The language that the font should support. The value should be a
3462 symbol whose name is a two-letter ISO-639 language name. On X, the
3463 value is matched against the ``Additional Style'' field of the XLFD
3464 name of a font, if it is non-empty. On MS-Windows, fonts matching the
3465 spec are required to support codepages needed for the language.
3466 Currently, only a small set of CJK languages is supported with this
3467 property: @samp{ja}, @samp{ko}, and @samp{zh}.
3468
3469 @item :otf
3470 @cindex OpenType font
3471 The font must be an OpenType font that supports these OpenType
3472 features, provided Emacs is compiled with a library, such as
3473 @samp{libotf} on GNU/Linux, that supports complex text layout for
3474 scripts which need that. The value must be a list of the form
3475
3476 @smallexample
3477 @code{(@var{script-tag} @var{langsys-tag} @var{gsub} @var{gpos})}
3478 @end smallexample
3479
3480 where @var{script-tag} is the OpenType script tag symbol;
3481 @var{langsys-tag} is the OpenType language system tag symbol, or
3482 @code{nil} to use the default language system; @code{gsub} is a list
3483 of OpenType GSUB feature tag symbols, or @code{nil} if none is
3484 required; and @code{gpos} is a list of OpenType GPOS feature tag
3485 symbols, or @code{nil} if none is required. If @code{gsub} or
3486 @code{gpos} is a list, a @code{nil} element in that list means that
3487 the font must not match any of the remaining tag symbols. The
3488 @code{gpos} element may be omitted.
3489 @end table
3490 @end defun
3491
3492 @defun font-put font-spec property value
3493 Set the font property @var{property} in the font-spec @var{font-spec}
3494 to @var{value}.
3495 @end defun
3496
3497 @cindex font entity
3498 A font entity is a reference to a font that need not be open. Its
3499 properties are intermediate between a font object and a font spec:
3500 like a font object, and unlike a font spec, it refers to a single,
3501 specific font. Unlike a font object, creating a font entity does not
3502 load the contents of that font into computer memory. Emacs may open
3503 multiple font objects of different sizes from a single font entity
3504 referring to a scalable font.
3505
3506 @defun find-font font-spec &optional frame
3507 This function returns a font entity that best matches the font spec
3508 @var{font-spec} on frame @var{frame}. If @var{frame} is @code{nil},
3509 it defaults to the selected frame.
3510 @end defun
3511
3512 @defun list-fonts font-spec &optional frame num prefer
3513 This function returns a list of all font entities that match the font
3514 spec @var{font-spec}.
3515
3516 The optional argument @var{frame}, if non-@code{nil}, specifies the
3517 frame on which the fonts are to be displayed. The optional argument
3518 @var{num}, if non-@code{nil}, should be an integer that specifies the
3519 maximum length of the returned list. The optional argument
3520 @var{prefer}, if non-@code{nil}, should be another font spec, which is
3521 used to control the order of the returned list; the returned font
3522 entities are sorted in order of decreasing closeness to that font
3523 spec.
3524 @end defun
3525
3526 If you call @code{set-face-attribute} and pass a font spec, font
3527 entity, or font name string as the value of the @code{:font}
3528 attribute, Emacs opens the best matching font that is available
3529 for display. It then stores the corresponding font object as the
3530 actual value of the @code{:font} attribute for that face.
3531
3532 The following functions can be used to obtain information about a
3533 font. For these functions, the @var{font} argument can be a font
3534 object, a font entity, or a font spec.
3535
3536 @defun font-get font property
3537 This function returns the value of the font property @var{property}
3538 for @var{font}.
3539
3540 If @var{font} is a font spec and the font spec does not specify
3541 @var{property}, the return value is @code{nil}. If @var{font} is a
3542 font object or font entity, the value for the @var{:script} property
3543 may be a list of scripts supported by the font.
3544 @end defun
3545
3546 @defun font-face-attributes font &optional frame
3547 This function returns a list of face attributes corresponding to
3548 @var{font}. The optional argument @var{frame} specifies the frame on
3549 which the font is to be displayed. If it is @code{nil}, the selected
3550 frame is used. The return value has the form
3551
3552 @smallexample
3553 (:family @var{family} :height @var{height} :weight @var{weight}
3554 :slant @var{slant} :width @var{width})
3555 @end smallexample
3556
3557 where the values of @var{family}, @var{height}, @var{weight},
3558 @var{slant}, and @var{width} are face attribute values. Some of these
3559 key-attribute pairs may be omitted from the list if they are not
3560 specified by @var{font}.
3561 @end defun
3562
3563 @defun font-xlfd-name font &optional fold-wildcards
3564 This function returns the XLFD (X Logical Font Descriptor), a string,
3565 matching @var{font}. @xref{Fonts,,, emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}, for
3566 information about XLFDs. If the name is too long for an XLFD (which
3567 can contain at most 255 characters), the function returns @code{nil}.
3568
3569 If the optional argument @var{fold-wildcards} is non-@code{nil},
3570 consecutive wildcards in the XLFD are folded into one.
3571 @end defun
3572
3573 The following two functions return important information about a font.
3574
3575 @defun font-info name &optional frame
3576 This function returns information about a font specified by its
3577 @var{name}, a string, as it is used on @var{frame}. If @var{frame} is
3578 omitted or @code{nil}, it defaults to the selected frame.
3579
3580 The value returned by the function is a vector of the form
3581 @code{[@var{opened-name} @var{full-name} @var{size} @var{height}
3582 @var{baseline-offset} @var{relative-compose} @var{default-ascent}
3583 @var{max-width} @var{ascent} @var{descent} @var{space-width}
3584 @var{average-width} @var{filename} @var{capability}]}. Here's the
3585 description of each components of this vector:
3586
3587 @table @var
3588 @item opened-name
3589 The name used to open the font, a string.
3590
3591 @item full-name
3592 The full name of the font, a string.
3593
3594 @item size
3595 The pixel size of the font.
3596
3597 @item height
3598 The height of the font in pixels.
3599
3600 @item baseline-offset
3601 The offset in pixels from the @acronym{ASCII} baseline, positive
3602 upward.
3603
3604 @item relative-compose
3605 @itemx default-ascent
3606 Numbers controlling how to compose characters.
3607
3608 @item ascent
3609 @itemx descent
3610 The ascent and descent of this font. The sum of these two numbers
3611 should be equal to the value of @var{height} above.
3612
3613 @item space-width
3614 The width, in pixels, of the font's space character.
3615
3616 @item average-width
3617 The average width of the font characters. If this is zero, Emacs uses
3618 the value of @var{space-width} instead, when it calculates text layout
3619 on display.
3620
3621 @item filename
3622 The file name of the font as a string. This can be @code{nil} if the
3623 font back-end does not provide a way to find out the font's file name.
3624
3625 @item capability
3626 A list whose first element is a symbol representing the font type, one
3627 of @code{x}, @code{opentype}, @code{truetype}, @code{type1},
3628 @code{pcf}, or @code{bdf}. For OpenType fonts, the list includes 2
3629 additional elements describing the @sc{gsub} and @sc{gpos} features
3630 supported by the font. Each of these elements is a list of the form
3631 @code{((@var{script} (@var{langsys} @var{feature} @dots{}) @dots{})
3632 @dots{})}, where @var{script} is a symbol representing an OpenType
3633 script tag, @var{langsys} is a symbol representing an OpenType langsys
3634 tag (or @code{nil}, which stands for the default langsys), and each
3635 @var{feature} is a symbol representing an OpenType feature tag.
3636 @end table
3637 @end defun
3638
3639 @defun query-font font-object
3640 This function returns information about a @var{font-object}. (This is
3641 in contrast to @code{font-info}, which takes the font name, a string,
3642 as its argument.)
3643
3644 The value returned by the function is a vector of the form
3645 @code{[@var{name} @var{filename} @var{pixel-size} @var{max-width}
3646 @var{ascent} @var{descent} @var{space-width} @var{average-width}
3647 @var{capability}]}. Here's the description of each components of this
3648 vector:
3649
3650 @table @var
3651 @item name
3652 The font name, a string.
3653
3654 @item filename
3655 The file name of the font as a string. This can be @code{nil} if the
3656 font back-end does not provide a way to find out the font's file name.
3657
3658 @item pixel-size
3659 The pixel size of the font used to open the font.
3660
3661 @item max-width
3662 The maximum advance width of the font.
3663
3664 @item ascent
3665 @itemx descent
3666 The ascent and descent of this font. The sum of these two numbers
3667 gives the font height.
3668
3669 @item space-width
3670 The width, in pixels, of the font's space character.
3671
3672 @item average-width
3673 The average width of the font characters. If this is zero, Emacs uses
3674 the value of @var{space-width} instead, when it calculates text layout
3675 on display.
3676
3677 @item capability
3678 A list whose first element is a symbol representing the font type, one
3679 of @code{x}, @code{opentype}, @code{truetype}, @code{type1},
3680 @code{pcf}, or @code{bdf}. For OpenType fonts, the list includes 2
3681 additional elements describing the @sc{gsub} and @sc{gpos} features
3682 supported by the font. Each of these elements is a list of the form
3683 @code{((@var{script} (@var{langsys} @var{feature} @dots{}) @dots{})
3684 @dots{})}, where @var{script} is a symbol representing an OpenType
3685 script tag, @var{langsys} is a symbol representing an OpenType langsys
3686 tag (or @code{nil}, which stands for the default langsys), and each
3687 @var{feature} is a symbol representing an OpenType feature tag.
3688 @end table
3689 @end defun
3690
3691 @cindex font information for layout
3692 The following four functions return size information about fonts used
3693 by various faces, allowing various layout considerations in Lisp
3694 programs. These functions take face remapping into consideration,
3695 returning information about the remapped face, if the face in question
3696 was remapped. @xref{Face Remapping}.
3697
3698 @defun default-font-width
3699 This function returns the average width in pixels of the font used by
3700 the current buffer's default face.
3701 @end defun
3702
3703 @defun default-font-height
3704 This function returns the height in pixels of the font used by the
3705 current buffer's default face.
3706 @end defun
3707
3708 @defun window-font-width &optional window face
3709 This function returns the average width in pixels for the font used by
3710 @var{face} in @var{window}. The specified @var{window} must be a live
3711 window. If @code{nil} or omitted, @var{window} defaults to the
3712 selected window, and @var{face} defaults to the default face in
3713 @var{window}.
3714 @end defun
3715
3716 @defun window-font-height &optional window face
3717 This function returns the height in pixels for the font used by
3718 @var{face} in @var{window}. The specified @var{window} must be a live
3719 window. If @code{nil} or omitted, @var{window} defaults to the
3720 selected window, and @var{face} defaults to the default face in
3721 @var{window}.
3722 @end defun
3723
3724 @node Fringes
3725 @section Fringes
3726 @cindex fringes
3727
3728 On graphical displays, Emacs draws @dfn{fringes} next to each
3729 window: thin vertical strips down the sides which can display bitmaps
3730 indicating truncation, continuation, horizontal scrolling, and so on.
3731
3732 @menu
3733 * Fringe Size/Pos:: Specifying where to put the window fringes.
3734 * Fringe Indicators:: Displaying indicator icons in the window fringes.
3735 * Fringe Cursors:: Displaying cursors in the right fringe.
3736 * Fringe Bitmaps:: Specifying bitmaps for fringe indicators.
3737 * Customizing Bitmaps:: Specifying your own bitmaps to use in the fringes.
3738 * Overlay Arrow:: Display of an arrow to indicate position.
3739 @end menu
3740
3741 @node Fringe Size/Pos
3742 @subsection Fringe Size and Position
3743
3744 The following buffer-local variables control the position and width
3745 of fringes in windows showing that buffer.
3746
3747 @defvar fringes-outside-margins
3748 The fringes normally appear between the display margins and the window
3749 text. If the value is non-@code{nil}, they appear outside the display
3750 margins. @xref{Display Margins}.
3751 @end defvar
3752
3753 @defvar left-fringe-width
3754 This variable, if non-@code{nil}, specifies the width of the left
3755 fringe in pixels. A value of @code{nil} means to use the left fringe
3756 width from the window's frame.
3757 @end defvar
3758
3759 @defvar right-fringe-width
3760 This variable, if non-@code{nil}, specifies the width of the right
3761 fringe in pixels. A value of @code{nil} means to use the right fringe
3762 width from the window's frame.
3763 @end defvar
3764
3765 Any buffer which does not specify values for these variables uses
3766 the values specified by the @code{left-fringe} and @code{right-fringe}
3767 frame parameters (@pxref{Layout Parameters}).
3768
3769 The above variables actually take effect via the function
3770 @code{set-window-buffer} (@pxref{Buffers and Windows}), which calls
3771 @code{set-window-fringes} as a subroutine. If you change one of these
3772 variables, the fringe display is not updated in existing windows
3773 showing the buffer, unless you call @code{set-window-buffer} again in
3774 each affected window. You can also use @code{set-window-fringes} to
3775 control the fringe display in individual windows.
3776
3777 @defun set-window-fringes window left &optional right outside-margins
3778 This function sets the fringe widths of window @var{window}.
3779 If @var{window} is @code{nil}, the selected window is used.
3780
3781 The argument @var{left} specifies the width in pixels of the left
3782 fringe, and likewise @var{right} for the right fringe. A value of
3783 @code{nil} for either one stands for the default width. If
3784 @var{outside-margins} is non-@code{nil}, that specifies that fringes
3785 should appear outside of the display margins.
3786 @end defun
3787
3788 @defun window-fringes &optional window
3789 This function returns information about the fringes of a window
3790 @var{window}. If @var{window} is omitted or @code{nil}, the selected
3791 window is used. The value has the form @code{(@var{left-width}
3792 @var{right-width} @var{outside-margins})}.
3793 @end defun
3794
3795
3796 @node Fringe Indicators
3797 @subsection Fringe Indicators
3798 @cindex fringe indicators
3799 @cindex indicators, fringe
3800
3801 @dfn{Fringe indicators} are tiny icons displayed in the window
3802 fringe to indicate truncated or continued lines, buffer boundaries,
3803 etc.
3804
3805 @defopt indicate-empty-lines
3806 @cindex fringes, and empty line indication
3807 @cindex empty lines, indicating
3808 When this is non-@code{nil}, Emacs displays a special glyph in the
3809 fringe of each empty line at the end of the buffer, on graphical
3810 displays. @xref{Fringes}. This variable is automatically
3811 buffer-local in every buffer.
3812 @end defopt
3813
3814 @defopt indicate-buffer-boundaries
3815 @cindex buffer boundaries, indicating
3816 This buffer-local variable controls how the buffer boundaries and
3817 window scrolling are indicated in the window fringes.
3818
3819 Emacs can indicate the buffer boundaries---that is, the first and last
3820 line in the buffer---with angle icons when they appear on the screen.
3821 In addition, Emacs can display an up-arrow in the fringe to show
3822 that there is text above the screen, and a down-arrow to show
3823 there is text below the screen.
3824
3825 There are three kinds of basic values:
3826
3827 @table @asis
3828 @item @code{nil}
3829 Don't display any of these fringe icons.
3830 @item @code{left}
3831 Display the angle icons and arrows in the left fringe.
3832 @item @code{right}
3833 Display the angle icons and arrows in the right fringe.
3834 @item any non-alist
3835 Display the angle icons in the left fringe
3836 and don't display the arrows.
3837 @end table
3838
3839 Otherwise the value should be an alist that specifies which fringe
3840 indicators to display and where. Each element of the alist should
3841 have the form @code{(@var{indicator} . @var{position})}. Here,
3842 @var{indicator} is one of @code{top}, @code{bottom}, @code{up},
3843 @code{down}, and @code{t} (which covers all the icons not yet
3844 specified), while @var{position} is one of @code{left}, @code{right}
3845 and @code{nil}.
3846
3847 For example, @code{((top . left) (t . right))} places the top angle
3848 bitmap in left fringe, and the bottom angle bitmap as well as both
3849 arrow bitmaps in right fringe. To show the angle bitmaps in the left
3850 fringe, and no arrow bitmaps, use @code{((top . left) (bottom . left))}.
3851 @end defopt
3852
3853 @defvar fringe-indicator-alist
3854 This buffer-local variable specifies the mapping from logical fringe
3855 indicators to the actual bitmaps displayed in the window fringes. The
3856 value is an alist of elements @code{(@var{indicator}
3857 . @var{bitmaps})}, where @var{indicator} specifies a logical indicator
3858 type and @var{bitmaps} specifies the fringe bitmaps to use for that
3859 indicator.
3860
3861 Each @var{indicator} should be one of the following symbols:
3862
3863 @table @asis
3864 @item @code{truncation}, @code{continuation}.
3865 Used for truncation and continuation lines.
3866
3867 @item @code{up}, @code{down}, @code{top}, @code{bottom}, @code{top-bottom}
3868 Used when @code{indicate-buffer-boundaries} is non-@code{nil}:
3869 @code{up} and @code{down} indicate a buffer boundary lying above or
3870 below the window edge; @code{top} and @code{bottom} indicate the
3871 topmost and bottommost buffer text line; and @code{top-bottom}
3872 indicates where there is just one line of text in the buffer.
3873
3874 @item @code{empty-line}
3875 Used to indicate empty lines when @code{indicate-empty-lines} is
3876 non-@code{nil}.
3877
3878 @item @code{overlay-arrow}
3879 Used for overlay arrows (@pxref{Overlay Arrow}).
3880 @c Is this used anywhere?
3881 @c @item Unknown bitmap indicator:
3882 @c @code{unknown}.
3883 @end table
3884
3885 Each @var{bitmaps} value may be a list of symbols @code{(@var{left}
3886 @var{right} [@var{left1} @var{right1}])}. The @var{left} and
3887 @var{right} symbols specify the bitmaps shown in the left and/or right
3888 fringe, for the specific indicator. @var{left1} and @var{right1} are
3889 specific to the @code{bottom} and @code{top-bottom} indicators, and
3890 are used to indicate that the last text line has no final newline.
3891 Alternatively, @var{bitmaps} may be a single symbol which is used in
3892 both left and right fringes.
3893
3894 @xref{Fringe Bitmaps}, for a list of standard bitmap symbols and how
3895 to define your own. In addition, @code{nil} represents the empty
3896 bitmap (i.e., an indicator that is not shown).
3897
3898 When @code{fringe-indicator-alist} has a buffer-local value, and
3899 there is no bitmap defined for a logical indicator, or the bitmap is
3900 @code{t}, the corresponding value from the default value of
3901 @code{fringe-indicator-alist} is used.
3902 @end defvar
3903
3904 @node Fringe Cursors
3905 @subsection Fringe Cursors
3906 @cindex fringe cursors
3907 @cindex cursor, fringe
3908
3909 When a line is exactly as wide as the window, Emacs displays the
3910 cursor in the right fringe instead of using two lines. Different
3911 bitmaps are used to represent the cursor in the fringe depending on
3912 the current buffer's cursor type.
3913
3914 @defopt overflow-newline-into-fringe
3915 If this is non-@code{nil}, lines exactly as wide as the window (not
3916 counting the final newline character) are not continued. Instead,
3917 when point is at the end of the line, the cursor appears in the right
3918 fringe.
3919 @end defopt
3920
3921 @defvar fringe-cursor-alist
3922 This variable specifies the mapping from logical cursor type to the
3923 actual fringe bitmaps displayed in the right fringe. The value is an
3924 alist where each element has the form @code{(@var{cursor-type}
3925 . @var{bitmap})}, which means to use the fringe bitmap @var{bitmap} to
3926 display cursors of type @var{cursor-type}.
3927
3928 Each @var{cursor-type} should be one of @code{box}, @code{hollow},
3929 @code{bar}, @code{hbar}, or @code{hollow-small}. The first four have
3930 the same meanings as in the @code{cursor-type} frame parameter
3931 (@pxref{Cursor Parameters}). The @code{hollow-small} type is used
3932 instead of @code{hollow} when the normal @code{hollow-rectangle}
3933 bitmap is too tall to fit on a specific display line.
3934
3935 Each @var{bitmap} should be a symbol specifying the fringe bitmap to
3936 be displayed for that logical cursor type.
3937 @iftex
3938 See the next subsection for details.
3939 @end iftex
3940 @ifnottex
3941 @xref{Fringe Bitmaps}.
3942 @end ifnottex
3943
3944 @c FIXME: I can't find the fringes-indicator-alist variable. Maybe
3945 @c it should be fringe-indicator-alist or fringe-cursor-alist? --xfq
3946 When @code{fringe-cursor-alist} has a buffer-local value, and there is
3947 no bitmap defined for a cursor type, the corresponding value from the
3948 default value of @code{fringes-indicator-alist} is used.
3949 @end defvar
3950
3951 @node Fringe Bitmaps
3952 @subsection Fringe Bitmaps
3953 @cindex fringe bitmaps
3954 @cindex bitmaps, fringe
3955
3956 The @dfn{fringe bitmaps} are the actual bitmaps which represent the
3957 logical fringe indicators for truncated or continued lines, buffer
3958 boundaries, overlay arrows, etc. Each bitmap is represented by a
3959 symbol.
3960 @iftex
3961 These symbols are referred to by the variables
3962 @code{fringe-indicator-alist} and @code{fringe-cursor-alist},
3963 described in the previous subsections.
3964 @end iftex
3965 @ifnottex
3966 These symbols are referred to by the variable
3967 @code{fringe-indicator-alist}, which maps fringe indicators to bitmaps
3968 (@pxref{Fringe Indicators}), and the variable
3969 @code{fringe-cursor-alist}, which maps fringe cursors to bitmaps
3970 (@pxref{Fringe Cursors}).
3971 @end ifnottex
3972
3973 Lisp programs can also directly display a bitmap in the left or
3974 right fringe, by using a @code{display} property for one of the
3975 characters appearing in the line (@pxref{Other Display Specs}). Such
3976 a display specification has the form
3977
3978 @example
3979 (@var{fringe} @var{bitmap} [@var{face}])
3980 @end example
3981
3982 @noindent
3983 @var{fringe} is either the symbol @code{left-fringe} or
3984 @code{right-fringe}. @var{bitmap} is a symbol identifying the bitmap
3985 to display. The optional @var{face} names a face whose foreground
3986 color is used to display the bitmap; this face is automatically merged
3987 with the @code{fringe} face.
3988
3989 Here is a list of the standard fringe bitmaps defined in Emacs, and
3990 how they are currently used in Emacs (via
3991 @code{fringe-indicator-alist} and @code{fringe-cursor-alist}):
3992
3993 @table @asis
3994 @item @code{left-arrow}, @code{right-arrow}
3995 Used to indicate truncated lines.
3996
3997 @item @code{left-curly-arrow}, @code{right-curly-arrow}
3998 Used to indicate continued lines.
3999
4000 @item @code{right-triangle}, @code{left-triangle}
4001 The former is used by overlay arrows. The latter is unused.
4002
4003 @item @code{up-arrow}, @code{down-arrow}, @code{top-left-angle} @code{top-right-angle}
4004 @itemx @code{bottom-left-angle}, @code{bottom-right-angle}
4005 @itemx @code{top-right-angle}, @code{top-left-angle}
4006 @itemx @code{left-bracket}, @code{right-bracket}, @code{top-right-angle}, @code{top-left-angle}
4007 Used to indicate buffer boundaries.
4008
4009 @item @code{filled-rectangle}, @code{hollow-rectangle}
4010 @itemx @code{filled-square}, @code{hollow-square}
4011 @itemx @code{vertical-bar}, @code{horizontal-bar}
4012 Used for different types of fringe cursors.
4013
4014 @item @code{empty-line}, @code{exclamation-mark}, @code{question-mark}, @code{exclamation-mark}
4015 Not used by core Emacs features.
4016 @end table
4017
4018 @noindent
4019 The next subsection describes how to define your own fringe bitmaps.
4020
4021 @defun fringe-bitmaps-at-pos &optional pos window
4022 This function returns the fringe bitmaps of the display line
4023 containing position @var{pos} in window @var{window}. The return
4024 value has the form @code{(@var{left} @var{right} @var{ov})}, where @var{left}
4025 is the symbol for the fringe bitmap in the left fringe (or @code{nil}
4026 if no bitmap), @var{right} is similar for the right fringe, and @var{ov}
4027 is non-@code{nil} if there is an overlay arrow in the left fringe.
4028
4029 The value is @code{nil} if @var{pos} is not visible in @var{window}.
4030 If @var{window} is @code{nil}, that stands for the selected window.
4031 If @var{pos} is @code{nil}, that stands for the value of point in
4032 @var{window}.
4033 @end defun
4034
4035 @node Customizing Bitmaps
4036 @subsection Customizing Fringe Bitmaps
4037 @cindex fringe bitmaps, customizing
4038
4039 @defun define-fringe-bitmap bitmap bits &optional height width align
4040 This function defines the symbol @var{bitmap} as a new fringe bitmap,
4041 or replaces an existing bitmap with that name.
4042
4043 The argument @var{bits} specifies the image to use. It should be
4044 either a string or a vector of integers, where each element (an
4045 integer) corresponds to one row of the bitmap. Each bit of an integer
4046 corresponds to one pixel of the bitmap, where the low bit corresponds
4047 to the rightmost pixel of the bitmap.
4048
4049 The height is normally the length of @var{bits}. However, you
4050 can specify a different height with non-@code{nil} @var{height}. The width
4051 is normally 8, but you can specify a different width with non-@code{nil}
4052 @var{width}. The width must be an integer between 1 and 16.
4053
4054 The argument @var{align} specifies the positioning of the bitmap
4055 relative to the range of rows where it is used; the default is to
4056 center the bitmap. The allowed values are @code{top}, @code{center},
4057 or @code{bottom}.
4058
4059 The @var{align} argument may also be a list @code{(@var{align}
4060 @var{periodic})} where @var{align} is interpreted as described above.
4061 If @var{periodic} is non-@code{nil}, it specifies that the rows in
4062 @code{bits} should be repeated enough times to reach the specified
4063 height.
4064 @end defun
4065
4066 @defun destroy-fringe-bitmap bitmap
4067 This function destroy the fringe bitmap identified by @var{bitmap}.
4068 If @var{bitmap} identifies a standard fringe bitmap, it actually
4069 restores the standard definition of that bitmap, instead of
4070 eliminating it entirely.
4071 @end defun
4072
4073 @defun set-fringe-bitmap-face bitmap &optional face
4074 This sets the face for the fringe bitmap @var{bitmap} to @var{face}.
4075 If @var{face} is @code{nil}, it selects the @code{fringe} face. The
4076 bitmap's face controls the color to draw it in.
4077
4078 @var{face} is merged with the @code{fringe} face, so normally
4079 @var{face} should specify only the foreground color.
4080 @end defun
4081
4082 @node Overlay Arrow
4083 @subsection The Overlay Arrow
4084 @c @cindex overlay arrow Duplicates variable names
4085
4086 The @dfn{overlay arrow} is useful for directing the user's attention
4087 to a particular line in a buffer. For example, in the modes used for
4088 interface to debuggers, the overlay arrow indicates the line of code
4089 about to be executed. This feature has nothing to do with
4090 @dfn{overlays} (@pxref{Overlays}).
4091
4092 @defvar overlay-arrow-string
4093 This variable holds the string to display to call attention to a
4094 particular line, or @code{nil} if the arrow feature is not in use.
4095 On a graphical display the contents of the string are ignored; instead a
4096 glyph is displayed in the fringe area to the left of the display area.
4097 @end defvar
4098
4099 @defvar overlay-arrow-position
4100 This variable holds a marker that indicates where to display the overlay
4101 arrow. It should point at the beginning of a line. On a non-graphical
4102 display the arrow text
4103 appears at the beginning of that line, overlaying any text that would
4104 otherwise appear. Since the arrow is usually short, and the line
4105 usually begins with indentation, normally nothing significant is
4106 overwritten.
4107
4108 The overlay-arrow string is displayed in any given buffer if the value
4109 of @code{overlay-arrow-position} in that buffer points into that
4110 buffer. Thus, it is possible to display multiple overlay arrow strings
4111 by creating buffer-local bindings of @code{overlay-arrow-position}.
4112 However, it is usually cleaner to use
4113 @code{overlay-arrow-variable-list} to achieve this result.
4114 @c !!! overlay-arrow-position: but the overlay string may remain in the display
4115 @c of some other buffer until an update is required. This should be fixed
4116 @c now. Is it?
4117 @end defvar
4118
4119 You can do a similar job by creating an overlay with a
4120 @code{before-string} property. @xref{Overlay Properties}.
4121
4122 You can define multiple overlay arrows via the variable
4123 @code{overlay-arrow-variable-list}.
4124
4125 @defvar overlay-arrow-variable-list
4126 This variable's value is a list of variables, each of which specifies
4127 the position of an overlay arrow. The variable
4128 @code{overlay-arrow-position} has its normal meaning because it is on
4129 this list.
4130 @end defvar
4131
4132 Each variable on this list can have properties
4133 @code{overlay-arrow-string} and @code{overlay-arrow-bitmap} that
4134 specify an overlay arrow string (for text terminals) or fringe bitmap
4135 (for graphical terminals) to display at the corresponding overlay
4136 arrow position. If either property is not set, the default
4137 @code{overlay-arrow-string} or @code{overlay-arrow} fringe indicator
4138 is used.
4139
4140
4141 @node Scroll Bars
4142 @section Scroll Bars
4143 @cindex scroll bars
4144
4145 Normally the frame parameter @code{vertical-scroll-bars} controls
4146 whether the windows in the frame have vertical scroll bars, and whether
4147 they are on the left or right. The frame parameter
4148 @code{scroll-bar-width} specifies how wide they are (@code{nil} meaning
4149 the default).
4150
4151 The frame parameter @code{horizontal-scroll-bars} controls whether
4152 the windows in the frame have horizontal scroll bars. The frame
4153 parameter @code{scroll-bar-height} specifies how high they are
4154 (@code{nil} meaning the default). @xref{Layout Parameters}.
4155
4156 @vindex horizontal-scroll-bars-available-p
4157 Horizontal scroll bars are not available on all platforms. The
4158 function @code{horizontal-scroll-bars-available-p} which takes no
4159 argument returns non-@code{nil} if they are available on your system.
4160
4161 The following three functions take as argument a live frame which
4162 defaults to the selected one.
4163
4164 @defun frame-current-scroll-bars &optional frame
4165 This function reports the scroll bar types for frame @var{frame}. The
4166 value is a cons cell @code{(@var{vertical-type} .@:
4167 @var{horizontal-type})}, where @var{vertical-type} is either
4168 @code{left}, @code{right}, or @code{nil} (which means no vertical scroll
4169 bar.) @var{horizontal-type} is either @code{bottom} or @code{nil}
4170 (which means no horizontal scroll bar).
4171 @end defun
4172
4173 @defun frame-scroll-bar-width &optional Lisp_Object &optional frame
4174 This function returns the width of vertical scroll bars of @var{frame}
4175 in pixels.
4176 @end defun
4177
4178 @defun frame-scroll-bar-height &optional Lisp_Object &optional frame
4179 This function returns the height of horizontal scroll bars of
4180 @var{frame} in pixels.
4181 @end defun
4182
4183 You can override the frame specific settings for individual windows by
4184 using the following function:
4185
4186 @defun set-window-scroll-bars window &optional width vertical-type height horizontal-type
4187 This function sets the width and/or height and the types of scroll bars
4188 for window @var{window}.
4189
4190 @var{width} specifies the width of the vertical scroll bar in pixels
4191 (@code{nil} means use the width specified for the frame).
4192 @var{vertical-type} specifies whether to have a vertical scroll bar and,
4193 if so, where. The possible values are @code{left}, @code{right},
4194 @code{t}, which means to use the frame's default, and @code{nil} for no
4195 vertical scroll bar.
4196
4197 @var{height} specifies the height of the horizontal scroll bar in pixels
4198 (@code{nil} means use the height specified for the frame).
4199 @var{horizontal-type} specifies whether to have a horizontal scroll bar.
4200 The possible values are @code{bottom}, @code{t}, which means to use the
4201 frame's default, and @code{nil} for no horizontal scroll bar.
4202
4203 If @var{window} is @code{nil}, the selected window is used.
4204 @end defun
4205
4206 The following four functions take as argument a live window which
4207 defaults to the selected one.
4208
4209 @defun window-scroll-bars &optional window
4210 This function returns a list of the form @code{(@var{width}
4211 @var{columns} @var{vertical-type} @var{height} @var{lines}
4212 @var{horizontal-type})}.
4213
4214 The value @var{width} is the value that was specified for the width of
4215 the vertical scroll bar (which may be @code{nil}); @var{columns} is the
4216 (possibly rounded) number of columns that the vertical scroll bar
4217 actually occupies.
4218
4219 The value @var{height} is the value that was specified for the height of
4220 the horizontal scroll bar (which may be @code{nil}); @var{lines} is the
4221 (possibly rounded) number of lines that the horizontally scroll bar
4222 actually occupies.
4223 @end defun
4224
4225 @defun window-current-scroll-bars &optional window
4226 This function reports the scroll bar type for window @var{window}. The
4227 value is a cons cell @code{(@var{vertical-type} .@:
4228 @var{horizontal-type})}. Unlike @code{window-scroll-bars}, this reports
4229 the scroll bar type actually used, once frame defaults and
4230 @code{scroll-bar-mode} are taken into account.
4231 @end defun
4232
4233 @defun window-scroll-bar-width &optional window
4234 This function returns the width in pixels of @var{window}'s vertical
4235 scrollbar.
4236 @end defun
4237
4238 @defun window-scroll-bar-height &optional window
4239 This function returns the height in pixels of @var{window}'s horizontal
4240 scrollbar.
4241 @end defun
4242
4243 If you don't specify these values for a window with
4244 @code{set-window-scroll-bars}, the buffer-local variables
4245 @code{vertical-scroll-bar}, @code{horizontal-scroll-bar},
4246 @code{scroll-bar-width} and @code{scroll-bar-height} in the buffer being
4247 displayed control the window's scroll bars. The function
4248 @code{set-window-buffer} examines these variables. If you change them
4249 in a buffer that is already visible in a window, you can make the window
4250 take note of the new values by calling @code{set-window-buffer}
4251 specifying the same buffer that is already displayed.
4252
4253 You can control the appearance of scroll bars for a particular buffer by
4254 setting the following variables which automatically become buffer-local
4255 when set.
4256
4257 @defvar vertical-scroll-bar
4258 This variable specifies the location of the vertical scroll bar. The
4259 possible values are @code{left}, @code{right}, @code{t}, which means to
4260 use the frame's default, and @code{nil} for no scroll bar.
4261 @end defvar
4262
4263 @defvar horizontal-scroll-bar
4264 This variable specifies the location of the horizontal scroll bar. The
4265 possible values are @code{bottom}, @code{t}, which means to use the
4266 frame's default, and @code{nil} for no scroll bar.
4267 @end defvar
4268
4269 @defvar scroll-bar-width
4270 This variable specifies the width of the buffer's vertical scroll bars,
4271 measured in pixels. A value of @code{nil} means to use the value
4272 specified by the frame.
4273 @end defvar
4274
4275 @defvar scroll-bar-height
4276 This variable specifies the height of the buffer's horizontal scroll
4277 bar, measured in pixels. A value of @code{nil} means to use the value
4278 specified by the frame.
4279 @end defvar
4280
4281 Finally you can toggle the display of scroll bars on all frames by
4282 customizing the variables @code{scroll-bar-mode} and
4283 @code{horizontal-scroll-bar-mode}.
4284
4285 @defopt scroll-bar-mode
4286 This variable controls whether and where to put vertical scroll bars in
4287 all frames. The possible values are @code{nil} for no scroll bars,
4288 @code{left} to put scroll bars on the left and @code{right} to put
4289 scroll bars on the right.
4290 @end defopt
4291
4292 @defopt horizontal-scroll-bar-mode
4293 This variable controls whether to display horizontal scroll bars on all
4294 frames.
4295 @end defopt
4296
4297
4298 @node Window Dividers
4299 @section Window Dividers
4300 @cindex window dividers
4301 @cindex right dividers
4302 @cindex bottom dividers
4303
4304 Window dividers are bars drawn between a frame's windows. A right
4305 divider is drawn between a window and any adjacent windows on the right.
4306 Its width (thickness) is specified by the frame parameter
4307 @code{right-divider-width}. A bottom divider is drawn between a
4308 window and adjacent windows on the bottom or the echo area. Its width
4309 is specified by the frame parameter @code{bottom-divider-width}. In
4310 either case, specifying a width of zero means to not draw such dividers.
4311 @xref{Layout Parameters}.
4312
4313 Technically, a right divider belongs to the window on its left,
4314 which means that its width contributes to the total width of that
4315 window. A bottom divider belongs to the window above it, which
4316 means that its width contributes to the total height of that window.
4317 @xref{Window Sizes}. When a window has both, a right and a bottom
4318 divider, the bottom divider prevails. This means that a bottom
4319 divider is drawn over the full total width of its window while the right
4320 divider ends above the bottom divider.
4321
4322 Dividers can be dragged with the mouse and are therefore useful for
4323 adjusting the sizes of adjacent windows with the mouse. They also serve
4324 to visually set apart adjacent windows when no scroll bars or mode lines
4325 are present. The following three faces allow the customization of the
4326 appearance of dividers:
4327
4328 @table @code
4329 @item window-divider
4330 When a divider is less than three pixels wide, it is drawn solidly with
4331 the foreground of this face. For larger dividers this face is used for
4332 the inner part only, excluding the first and last pixel.
4333
4334 @item window-divider-first-pixel
4335 This is the face used for drawing the first pixel of a divider that is
4336 at least three pixels wide. To obtain a solid appearance, set this to
4337 the same value used for the @code{window-divider} face.
4338
4339 @item window-divider-last-pixel
4340 This is the face used for drawing the last pixel of a divider that is at
4341 least three pixels wide. To obtain a solid appearance, set this to the
4342 same value used for the @code{window-divider} face.
4343 @end table
4344
4345 You can get the sizes of the dividers of a specific window with the
4346 following two functions.
4347
4348 @defun window-right-divider-width &optional window
4349 Return the width (thickness) in pixels of @var{window}'s right divider.
4350 @var{window} must be a live window and defaults to the selected one.
4351 The return value is always zero for a rightmost window.
4352 @end defun
4353
4354 @defun window-bottom-divider-width &optional window
4355 Return the width (thickness) in pixels of @var{window}'s bottom divider.
4356 @var{window} must be a live window and defaults to the selected one.
4357 The return value is zero for the minibuffer window or a bottommost
4358 window on a minibuffer-less frame.
4359 @end defun
4360
4361
4362 @node Display Property
4363 @section The @code{display} Property
4364 @cindex display specification
4365 @kindex display @r{(text property)}
4366
4367 The @code{display} text property (or overlay property) is used to
4368 insert images into text, and to control other aspects of how text
4369 displays. The value of the @code{display} property should be a
4370 display specification, or a list or vector containing several display
4371 specifications. Display specifications in the same @code{display}
4372 property value generally apply in parallel to the text they cover.
4373
4374 If several sources (overlays and/or a text property) specify values
4375 for the @code{display} property, only one of the values takes effect,
4376 following the rules of @code{get-char-property}. @xref{Examining
4377 Properties}.
4378
4379 The rest of this section describes several kinds of
4380 display specifications and what they mean.
4381
4382 @menu
4383 * Replacing Specs:: Display specs that replace the text.
4384 * Specified Space:: Displaying one space with a specified width.
4385 * Pixel Specification:: Specifying space width or height in pixels.
4386 * Other Display Specs:: Displaying an image; adjusting the height,
4387 spacing, and other properties of text.
4388 * Display Margins:: Displaying text or images to the side of the main text.
4389 @end menu
4390
4391 @node Replacing Specs
4392 @subsection Display Specs That Replace The Text
4393 @cindex replacing display specs
4394
4395 Some kinds of display specifications specify something to display
4396 instead of the text that has the property. These are called
4397 @dfn{replacing} display specifications. Emacs does not allow the user
4398 to interactively move point into the middle of buffer text that is
4399 replaced in this way.
4400
4401 If a list of display specifications includes more than one replacing
4402 display specification, the first overrides the rest. Replacing
4403 display specifications make most other display specifications
4404 irrelevant, since those don't apply to the replacement.
4405
4406 For replacing display specifications, @dfn{the text that has the
4407 property} means all the consecutive characters that have the same
4408 Lisp object as their @code{display} property; these characters are
4409 replaced as a single unit. If two characters have different Lisp
4410 objects as their @code{display} properties (i.e., objects which are
4411 not @code{eq}), they are handled separately.
4412
4413 Here is an example which illustrates this point. A string serves as
4414 a replacing display specification, which replaces the text that has
4415 the property with the specified string (@pxref{Other Display Specs}).
4416 Consider the following function:
4417
4418 @smallexample
4419 (defun foo ()
4420 (dotimes (i 5)
4421 (let ((string (concat "A"))
4422 (start (+ i i (point-min))))
4423 (put-text-property start (1+ start) 'display string)
4424 (put-text-property start (+ 2 start) 'display string))))
4425 @end smallexample
4426
4427 @noindent
4428 This function gives each of the first ten characters in the buffer a
4429 @code{display} property which is a string @code{"A"}, but they don't
4430 all get the same string object. The first two characters get the same
4431 string object, so they are replaced with one @samp{A}; the fact that
4432 the display property was assigned in two separate calls to
4433 @code{put-text-property} is irrelevant. Similarly, the next two
4434 characters get a second string (@code{concat} creates a new string
4435 object), so they are replaced with one @samp{A}; and so on. Thus, the
4436 ten characters appear as five A's.
4437
4438 @node Specified Space
4439 @subsection Specified Spaces
4440 @cindex spaces, specified height or width
4441 @cindex variable-width spaces
4442
4443 To display a space of specified width and/or height, use a display
4444 specification of the form @code{(space . @var{props})}, where
4445 @var{props} is a property list (a list of alternating properties and
4446 values). You can put this property on one or more consecutive
4447 characters; a space of the specified height and width is displayed in
4448 place of @emph{all} of those characters. These are the properties you
4449 can use in @var{props} to specify the weight of the space:
4450
4451 @table @code
4452 @item :width @var{width}
4453 If @var{width} is a number, it specifies
4454 that the space width should be @var{width} times the normal character
4455 width. @var{width} can also be a @dfn{pixel width} specification
4456 (@pxref{Pixel Specification}).
4457
4458 @item :relative-width @var{factor}
4459 Specifies that the width of the stretch should be computed from the
4460 first character in the group of consecutive characters that have the
4461 same @code{display} property. The space width is the pixel width of
4462 that character, multiplied by @var{factor}. (On text-mode terminals,
4463 the ``pixel width'' of a character is usually 1, but it could be more
4464 for TABs and double-width CJK characters.)
4465
4466 @item :align-to @var{hpos}
4467 Specifies that the space should be wide enough to reach @var{hpos}.
4468 If @var{hpos} is a number, it is measured in units of the normal
4469 character width. @var{hpos} can also be a @dfn{pixel width}
4470 specification (@pxref{Pixel Specification}).
4471 @end table
4472
4473 You should use one and only one of the above properties. You can
4474 also specify the height of the space, with these properties:
4475
4476 @table @code
4477 @item :height @var{height}
4478 Specifies the height of the space.
4479 If @var{height} is a number, it specifies
4480 that the space height should be @var{height} times the normal character
4481 height. The @var{height} may also be a @dfn{pixel height} specification
4482 (@pxref{Pixel Specification}).
4483
4484 @item :relative-height @var{factor}
4485 Specifies the height of the space, multiplying the ordinary height
4486 of the text having this display specification by @var{factor}.
4487
4488 @item :ascent @var{ascent}
4489 If the value of @var{ascent} is a non-negative number no greater than
4490 100, it specifies that @var{ascent} percent of the height of the space
4491 should be considered as the ascent of the space---that is, the part
4492 above the baseline. The ascent may also be specified in pixel units
4493 with a @dfn{pixel ascent} specification (@pxref{Pixel Specification}).
4494
4495 @end table
4496
4497 Don't use both @code{:height} and @code{:relative-height} together.
4498
4499 The @code{:width} and @code{:align-to} properties are supported on
4500 non-graphic terminals, but the other space properties in this section
4501 are not.
4502
4503 Note that space properties are treated as paragraph separators for
4504 the purposes of reordering bidirectional text for display.
4505 @xref{Bidirectional Display}, for the details.
4506
4507 @node Pixel Specification
4508 @subsection Pixel Specification for Spaces
4509 @cindex spaces, pixel specification
4510
4511 The value of the @code{:width}, @code{:align-to}, @code{:height},
4512 and @code{:ascent} properties can be a special kind of expression that
4513 is evaluated during redisplay. The result of the evaluation is used
4514 as an absolute number of pixels.
4515
4516 The following expressions are supported:
4517
4518 @smallexample
4519 @group
4520 @var{expr} ::= @var{num} | (@var{num}) | @var{unit} | @var{elem} | @var{pos} | @var{image} | @var{form}
4521 @var{num} ::= @var{integer} | @var{float} | @var{symbol}
4522 @var{unit} ::= in | mm | cm | width | height
4523 @end group
4524 @group
4525 @var{elem} ::= left-fringe | right-fringe | left-margin | right-margin
4526 | scroll-bar | text
4527 @var{pos} ::= left | center | right
4528 @var{form} ::= (@var{num} . @var{expr}) | (@var{op} @var{expr} ...)
4529 @var{op} ::= + | -
4530 @end group
4531 @end smallexample
4532
4533 The form @var{num} specifies a fraction of the default frame font
4534 height or width. The form @code{(@var{num})} specifies an absolute
4535 number of pixels. If @var{num} is a symbol, @var{symbol}, its
4536 buffer-local variable binding is used.
4537
4538 The @code{in}, @code{mm}, and @code{cm} units specify the number of
4539 pixels per inch, millimeter, and centimeter, respectively. The
4540 @code{width} and @code{height} units correspond to the default width
4541 and height of the current face. An image specification @code{image}
4542 corresponds to the width or height of the image.
4543
4544 The elements @code{left-fringe}, @code{right-fringe},
4545 @code{left-margin}, @code{right-margin}, @code{scroll-bar}, and
4546 @code{text} specify to the width of the corresponding area of the
4547 window.
4548
4549 The @code{left}, @code{center}, and @code{right} positions can be
4550 used with @code{:align-to} to specify a position relative to the left
4551 edge, center, or right edge of the text area.
4552
4553 Any of the above window elements (except @code{text}) can also be
4554 used with @code{:align-to} to specify that the position is relative to
4555 the left edge of the given area. Once the base offset for a relative
4556 position has been set (by the first occurrence of one of these
4557 symbols), further occurrences of these symbols are interpreted as the
4558 width of the specified area. For example, to align to the center of
4559 the left-margin, use
4560
4561 @example
4562 :align-to (+ left-margin (0.5 . left-margin))
4563 @end example
4564
4565 If no specific base offset is set for alignment, it is always relative
4566 to the left edge of the text area. For example, @samp{:align-to 0} in a
4567 header-line aligns with the first text column in the text area.
4568
4569 A value of the form @code{(@var{num} . @var{expr})} stands for the
4570 product of the values of @var{num} and @var{expr}. For example,
4571 @code{(2 . in)} specifies a width of 2 inches, while @code{(0.5 .
4572 @var{image})} specifies half the width (or height) of the specified
4573 image.
4574
4575 The form @code{(+ @var{expr} ...)} adds up the value of the
4576 expressions. The form @code{(- @var{expr} ...)} negates or subtracts
4577 the value of the expressions.
4578
4579 @node Other Display Specs
4580 @subsection Other Display Specifications
4581
4582 Here are the other sorts of display specifications that you can use
4583 in the @code{display} text property.
4584
4585 @table @code
4586 @item @var{string}
4587 Display @var{string} instead of the text that has this property.
4588
4589 Recursive display specifications are not supported---@var{string}'s
4590 @code{display} properties, if any, are not used.
4591
4592 @item (image . @var{image-props})
4593 This kind of display specification is an image descriptor (@pxref{Images}).
4594 When used as a display specification, it means to display the image
4595 instead of the text that has the display specification.
4596
4597 @item (slice @var{x} @var{y} @var{width} @var{height})
4598 This specification together with @code{image} specifies a @dfn{slice}
4599 (a partial area) of the image to display. The elements @var{y} and
4600 @var{x} specify the top left corner of the slice, within the image;
4601 @var{width} and @var{height} specify the width and height of the
4602 slice. Integers are numbers of pixels. A floating-point number
4603 in the range 0.0--1.0 stands for that fraction of the width or height
4604 of the entire image.
4605
4606 @item ((margin nil) @var{string})
4607 A display specification of this form means to display @var{string}
4608 instead of the text that has the display specification, at the same
4609 position as that text. It is equivalent to using just @var{string},
4610 but it is done as a special case of marginal display (@pxref{Display
4611 Margins}).
4612
4613 @item (left-fringe @var{bitmap} @r{[}@var{face}@r{]})
4614 @itemx (right-fringe @var{bitmap} @r{[}@var{face}@r{]})
4615 This display specification on any character of a line of text causes
4616 the specified @var{bitmap} be displayed in the left or right fringes
4617 for that line, instead of the characters that have the display
4618 specification. The optional @var{face} specifies the colors to be
4619 used for the bitmap. @xref{Fringe Bitmaps}, for the details.
4620
4621 @item (space-width @var{factor})
4622 This display specification affects all the space characters within the
4623 text that has the specification. It displays all of these spaces
4624 @var{factor} times as wide as normal. The element @var{factor} should
4625 be an integer or float. Characters other than spaces are not affected
4626 at all; in particular, this has no effect on tab characters.
4627
4628 @item (height @var{height})
4629 This display specification makes the text taller or shorter.
4630 Here are the possibilities for @var{height}:
4631
4632 @table @asis
4633 @item @code{(+ @var{n})}
4634 @c FIXME: Add an index for "step"? --xfq
4635 This means to use a font that is @var{n} steps larger. A @dfn{step} is
4636 defined by the set of available fonts---specifically, those that match
4637 what was otherwise specified for this text, in all attributes except
4638 height. Each size for which a suitable font is available counts as
4639 another step. @var{n} should be an integer.
4640
4641 @item @code{(- @var{n})}
4642 This means to use a font that is @var{n} steps smaller.
4643
4644 @item a number, @var{factor}
4645 A number, @var{factor}, means to use a font that is @var{factor} times
4646 as tall as the default font.
4647
4648 @item a symbol, @var{function}
4649 A symbol is a function to compute the height. It is called with the
4650 current height as argument, and should return the new height to use.
4651
4652 @item anything else, @var{form}
4653 If the @var{height} value doesn't fit the previous possibilities, it is
4654 a form. Emacs evaluates it to get the new height, with the symbol
4655 @code{height} bound to the current specified font height.
4656 @end table
4657
4658 @item (raise @var{factor})
4659 This kind of display specification raises or lowers the text
4660 it applies to, relative to the baseline of the line.
4661
4662 @var{factor} must be a number, which is interpreted as a multiple of the
4663 height of the affected text. If it is positive, that means to display
4664 the characters raised. If it is negative, that means to display them
4665 lower down.
4666
4667 If the text also has a @code{height} display specification, that does
4668 not affect the amount of raising or lowering, which is based on the
4669 faces used for the text.
4670 @end table
4671
4672 @c We put all the '@code{(when ...)}' on one line to encourage
4673 @c makeinfo's end-of-sentence heuristics to DTRT. Previously, the dot
4674 @c was at eol; the info file ended up w/ two spaces rendered after it.
4675 You can make any display specification conditional. To do that,
4676 package it in another list of the form
4677 @code{(when @var{condition} . @var{spec})}.
4678 Then the specification @var{spec} applies only when
4679 @var{condition} evaluates to a non-@code{nil} value. During the
4680 evaluation, @code{object} is bound to the string or buffer having the
4681 conditional @code{display} property. @code{position} and
4682 @code{buffer-position} are bound to the position within @code{object}
4683 and the buffer position where the @code{display} property was found,
4684 respectively. Both positions can be different when @code{object} is a
4685 string.
4686
4687 @node Display Margins
4688 @subsection Displaying in the Margins
4689 @cindex display margins
4690 @cindex margins, display
4691
4692 A buffer can have blank areas called @dfn{display margins} on the
4693 left and on the right. Ordinary text never appears in these areas,
4694 but you can put things into the display margins using the
4695 @code{display} property. There is currently no way to make text or
4696 images in the margin mouse-sensitive.
4697
4698 The way to display something in the margins is to specify it in a
4699 margin display specification in the @code{display} property of some
4700 text. This is a replacing display specification, meaning that the
4701 text you put it on does not get displayed; the margin display appears,
4702 but that text does not.
4703
4704 A margin display specification looks like @code{((margin
4705 right-margin) @var{spec})} or @code{((margin left-margin) @var{spec})}.
4706 Here, @var{spec} is another display specification that says what to
4707 display in the margin. Typically it is a string of text to display,
4708 or an image descriptor.
4709
4710 To display something in the margin @emph{in association with}
4711 certain buffer text, without altering or preventing the display of
4712 that text, put a @code{before-string} property on the text and put the
4713 margin display specification on the contents of the before-string.
4714
4715 Before the display margins can display anything, you must give
4716 them a nonzero width. The usual way to do that is to set these
4717 variables:
4718
4719 @defvar left-margin-width
4720 This variable specifies the width of the left margin, in character
4721 cell (a.k.a.@: ``column'') units. It is buffer-local in all buffers.
4722 A value of @code{nil} means no left marginal area.
4723 @end defvar
4724
4725 @defvar right-margin-width
4726 This variable specifies the width of the right margin, in character
4727 cell units. It is buffer-local in all buffers. A value of @code{nil}
4728 means no right marginal area.
4729 @end defvar
4730
4731 Setting these variables does not immediately affect the window. These
4732 variables are checked when a new buffer is displayed in the window.
4733 Thus, you can make changes take effect by calling
4734 @code{set-window-buffer}.
4735
4736 You can also set the margin widths immediately.
4737
4738 @defun set-window-margins window left &optional right
4739 This function specifies the margin widths for window @var{window}, in
4740 character cell units. The argument @var{left} controls the left
4741 margin, and @var{right} controls the right margin (default @code{0}).
4742 @end defun
4743
4744 @defun window-margins &optional window
4745 This function returns the width of the left and right margins of
4746 @var{window} as a cons cell of the form @w{@code{(@var{left}
4747 . @var{right})}}. If one of the two marginal areas does not exist,
4748 its width is returned as @code{nil}; if neither of the two margins exist,
4749 the function returns @code{(nil)}. If @var{window} is @code{nil}, the
4750 selected window is used.
4751 @end defun
4752
4753 @node Images
4754 @section Images
4755 @cindex images in buffers
4756
4757 To display an image in an Emacs buffer, you must first create an image
4758 descriptor, then use it as a display specifier in the @code{display}
4759 property of text that is displayed (@pxref{Display Property}).
4760
4761 Emacs is usually able to display images when it is run on a
4762 graphical terminal. Images cannot be displayed in a text terminal, on
4763 certain graphical terminals that lack the support for this, or if
4764 Emacs is compiled without image support. You can use the function
4765 @code{display-images-p} to determine if images can in principle be
4766 displayed (@pxref{Display Feature Testing}).
4767
4768 @menu
4769 * Image Formats:: Supported image formats.
4770 * Image Descriptors:: How to specify an image for use in @code{:display}.
4771 * XBM Images:: Special features for XBM format.
4772 * XPM Images:: Special features for XPM format.
4773 * PostScript Images:: Special features for PostScript format.
4774 * ImageMagick Images:: Special features available through ImageMagick.
4775 * Other Image Types:: Various other formats are supported.
4776 * Defining Images:: Convenient ways to define an image for later use.
4777 * Showing Images:: Convenient ways to display an image once it is defined.
4778 * Multi-Frame Images:: Some images contain more than one frame.
4779 * Image Cache:: Internal mechanisms of image display.
4780 @end menu
4781
4782 @node Image Formats
4783 @subsection Image Formats
4784 @cindex image formats
4785 @cindex image types
4786
4787 Emacs can display a number of different image formats. Some of
4788 these image formats are supported only if particular support libraries
4789 are installed. On some platforms, Emacs can load support libraries on
4790 demand; if so, the variable @code{dynamic-library-alist} can be used
4791 to modify the set of known names for these dynamic libraries.
4792 @xref{Dynamic Libraries}.
4793
4794 Supported image formats (and the required support libraries) include
4795 PBM and XBM (which do not depend on support libraries and are always
4796 available), XPM (@code{libXpm}), GIF (@code{libgif} or
4797 @code{libungif}), PostScript (@code{gs}), JPEG (@code{libjpeg}), TIFF
4798 (@code{libtiff}), PNG (@code{libpng}), and SVG (@code{librsvg}).
4799
4800 Each of these image formats is associated with an @dfn{image type
4801 symbol}. The symbols for the above formats are, respectively,
4802 @code{pbm}, @code{xbm}, @code{xpm}, @code{gif}, @code{postscript},
4803 @code{jpeg}, @code{tiff}, @code{png}, and @code{svg}.
4804
4805 Furthermore, if you build Emacs with ImageMagick
4806 (@code{libMagickWand}) support, Emacs can display any image format
4807 that ImageMagick can. @xref{ImageMagick Images}. All images
4808 displayed via ImageMagick have type symbol @code{imagemagick}.
4809
4810 @defvar image-types
4811 This variable contains a list of type symbols for image formats which
4812 are potentially supported in the current configuration.
4813
4814 ``Potentially'' means that Emacs knows about the image types, not
4815 necessarily that they can be used (for example, they could depend on
4816 unavailable dynamic libraries). To know which image types are really
4817 available, use @code{image-type-available-p}.
4818 @end defvar
4819
4820 @defun image-type-available-p type
4821 This function returns non-@code{nil} if images of type @var{type} can
4822 be loaded and displayed. @var{type} must be an image type symbol.
4823
4824 For image types whose support libraries are statically linked, this
4825 function always returns @code{t}. For image types whose support
4826 libraries are dynamically loaded, it returns @code{t} if the library
4827 could be loaded and @code{nil} otherwise.
4828 @end defun
4829
4830 @node Image Descriptors
4831 @subsection Image Descriptors
4832 @cindex image descriptor
4833
4834 An @dfn{image descriptor} is a list which specifies the underlying
4835 data for an image, and how to display it. It is typically used as the
4836 value of a @code{display} overlay or text property (@pxref{Other
4837 Display Specs}); but @xref{Showing Images}, for convenient helper
4838 functions to insert images into buffers.
4839
4840 Each image descriptor has the form @code{(image . @var{props})},
4841 where @var{props} is a property list of alternating keyword symbols
4842 and values, including at least the pair @code{:type @var{type}} that
4843 specifies the image type.
4844
4845 The following is a list of properties that are meaningful for all
4846 image types (there are also properties which are meaningful only for
4847 certain image types, as documented in the following subsections):
4848
4849 @table @code
4850 @item :type @var{type}
4851 The image type.
4852 @ifnottex
4853 @xref{Image Formats}.
4854 @end ifnottex
4855 Every image descriptor must include this property.
4856
4857 @item :file @var{file}
4858 This says to load the image from file @var{file}. If @var{file} is
4859 not an absolute file name, it is expanded in @code{data-directory}.
4860
4861 @item :data @var{data}
4862 This specifies the raw image data. Each image descriptor must have
4863 either @code{:data} or @code{:file}, but not both.
4864
4865 For most image types, the value of a @code{:data} property should be a
4866 string containing the image data. Some image types do not support
4867 @code{:data}; for some others, @code{:data} alone is not enough, so
4868 you need to use other image properties along with @code{:data}. See
4869 the following subsections for details.
4870
4871 @item :margin @var{margin}
4872 This specifies how many pixels to add as an extra margin around the
4873 image. The value, @var{margin}, must be a non-negative number, or a
4874 pair @code{(@var{x} . @var{y})} of such numbers. If it is a pair,
4875 @var{x} specifies how many pixels to add horizontally, and @var{y}
4876 specifies how many pixels to add vertically. If @code{:margin} is not
4877 specified, the default is zero.
4878
4879 @item :ascent @var{ascent}
4880 This specifies the amount of the image's height to use for its
4881 ascent---that is, the part above the baseline. The value,
4882 @var{ascent}, must be a number in the range 0 to 100, or the symbol
4883 @code{center}.
4884
4885 If @var{ascent} is a number, that percentage of the image's height is
4886 used for its ascent.
4887
4888 If @var{ascent} is @code{center}, the image is vertically centered
4889 around a centerline which would be the vertical centerline of text drawn
4890 at the position of the image, in the manner specified by the text
4891 properties and overlays that apply to the image.
4892
4893 If this property is omitted, it defaults to 50.
4894
4895 @item :relief @var{relief}
4896 This adds a shadow rectangle around the image. The value,
4897 @var{relief}, specifies the width of the shadow lines, in pixels. If
4898 @var{relief} is negative, shadows are drawn so that the image appears
4899 as a pressed button; otherwise, it appears as an unpressed button.
4900
4901 @item :conversion @var{algorithm}
4902 This specifies a conversion algorithm that should be applied to the
4903 image before it is displayed; the value, @var{algorithm}, specifies
4904 which algorithm.
4905
4906 @table @code
4907 @item laplace
4908 @itemx emboss
4909 Specifies the Laplace edge detection algorithm, which blurs out small
4910 differences in color while highlighting larger differences. People
4911 sometimes consider this useful for displaying the image for a
4912 disabled button.
4913
4914 @item (edge-detection :matrix @var{matrix} :color-adjust @var{adjust})
4915 @cindex edge detection, images
4916 Specifies a general edge-detection algorithm. @var{matrix} must be
4917 either a nine-element list or a nine-element vector of numbers. A pixel
4918 at position @math{x/y} in the transformed image is computed from
4919 original pixels around that position. @var{matrix} specifies, for each
4920 pixel in the neighborhood of @math{x/y}, a factor with which that pixel
4921 will influence the transformed pixel; element @math{0} specifies the
4922 factor for the pixel at @math{x-1/y-1}, element @math{1} the factor for
4923 the pixel at @math{x/y-1} etc., as shown below:
4924 @iftex
4925 @tex
4926 $$\pmatrix{x-1/y-1 & x/y-1 & x+1/y-1 \cr
4927 x-1/y & x/y & x+1/y \cr
4928 x-1/y+1& x/y+1 & x+1/y+1 \cr}$$
4929 @end tex
4930 @end iftex
4931 @ifnottex
4932 @display
4933 (x-1/y-1 x/y-1 x+1/y-1
4934 x-1/y x/y x+1/y
4935 x-1/y+1 x/y+1 x+1/y+1)
4936 @end display
4937 @end ifnottex
4938
4939 The resulting pixel is computed from the color intensity of the color
4940 resulting from summing up the RGB values of surrounding pixels,
4941 multiplied by the specified factors, and dividing that sum by the sum
4942 of the factors' absolute values.
4943
4944 Laplace edge-detection currently uses a matrix of
4945 @iftex
4946 @tex
4947 $$\pmatrix{1 & 0 & 0 \cr
4948 0& 0 & 0 \cr
4949 0 & 0 & -1 \cr}$$
4950 @end tex
4951 @end iftex
4952 @ifnottex
4953 @display
4954 (1 0 0
4955 0 0 0
4956 0 0 -1)
4957 @end display
4958 @end ifnottex
4959
4960 Emboss edge-detection uses a matrix of
4961 @iftex
4962 @tex
4963 $$\pmatrix{ 2 & -1 & 0 \cr
4964 -1 & 0 & 1 \cr
4965 0 & 1 & -2 \cr}$$
4966 @end tex
4967 @end iftex
4968 @ifnottex
4969 @display
4970 ( 2 -1 0
4971 -1 0 1
4972 0 1 -2)
4973 @end display
4974 @end ifnottex
4975
4976 @item disabled
4977 Specifies transforming the image so that it looks disabled.
4978 @end table
4979
4980 @item :mask @var{mask}
4981 If @var{mask} is @code{heuristic} or @code{(heuristic @var{bg})}, build
4982 a clipping mask for the image, so that the background of a frame is
4983 visible behind the image. If @var{bg} is not specified, or if @var{bg}
4984 is @code{t}, determine the background color of the image by looking at
4985 the four corners of the image, assuming the most frequently occurring
4986 color from the corners is the background color of the image. Otherwise,
4987 @var{bg} must be a list @code{(@var{red} @var{green} @var{blue})}
4988 specifying the color to assume for the background of the image.
4989
4990 If @var{mask} is @code{nil}, remove a mask from the image, if it has
4991 one. Images in some formats include a mask which can be removed by
4992 specifying @code{:mask nil}.
4993
4994 @item :pointer @var{shape}
4995 This specifies the pointer shape when the mouse pointer is over this
4996 image. @xref{Pointer Shape}, for available pointer shapes.
4997
4998 @item :map @var{map}
4999 @cindex image maps
5000 This associates an image map of @dfn{hot spots} with this image.
5001
5002 An image map is an alist where each element has the format
5003 @code{(@var{area} @var{id} @var{plist})}. An @var{area} is specified
5004 as either a rectangle, a circle, or a polygon.
5005
5006 A rectangle is a cons
5007 @code{(rect . ((@var{x0} . @var{y0}) . (@var{x1} . @var{y1})))}
5008 which specifies the pixel coordinates of the upper left and bottom right
5009 corners of the rectangle area.
5010
5011 A circle is a cons
5012 @code{(circle . ((@var{x0} . @var{y0}) . @var{r}))}
5013 which specifies the center and the radius of the circle; @var{r} may
5014 be a float or integer.
5015
5016 A polygon is a cons
5017 @code{(poly . [@var{x0} @var{y0} @var{x1} @var{y1} ...])}
5018 where each pair in the vector describes one corner in the polygon.
5019
5020 When the mouse pointer lies on a hot-spot area of an image, the
5021 @var{plist} of that hot-spot is consulted; if it contains a @code{help-echo}
5022 property, that defines a tool-tip for the hot-spot, and if it contains
5023 a @code{pointer} property, that defines the shape of the mouse cursor when
5024 it is on the hot-spot.
5025 @xref{Pointer Shape}, for available pointer shapes.
5026
5027 When you click the mouse when the mouse pointer is over a hot-spot, an
5028 event is composed by combining the @var{id} of the hot-spot with the
5029 mouse event; for instance, @code{[area4 mouse-1]} if the hot-spot's
5030 @var{id} is @code{area4}.
5031 @end table
5032
5033 @defun image-mask-p spec &optional frame
5034 This function returns @code{t} if image @var{spec} has a mask bitmap.
5035 @var{frame} is the frame on which the image will be displayed.
5036 @var{frame} @code{nil} or omitted means to use the selected frame
5037 (@pxref{Input Focus}).
5038 @end defun
5039
5040 @node XBM Images
5041 @subsection XBM Images
5042 @cindex XBM
5043
5044 To use XBM format, specify @code{xbm} as the image type. This image
5045 format doesn't require an external library, so images of this type are
5046 always supported.
5047
5048 Additional image properties supported for the @code{xbm} image type are:
5049
5050 @table @code
5051 @item :foreground @var{foreground}
5052 The value, @var{foreground}, should be a string specifying the image
5053 foreground color, or @code{nil} for the default color. This color is
5054 used for each pixel in the XBM that is 1. The default is the frame's
5055 foreground color.
5056
5057 @item :background @var{background}
5058 The value, @var{background}, should be a string specifying the image
5059 background color, or @code{nil} for the default color. This color is
5060 used for each pixel in the XBM that is 0. The default is the frame's
5061 background color.
5062 @end table
5063
5064 If you specify an XBM image using data within Emacs instead of an
5065 external file, use the following three properties:
5066
5067 @table @code
5068 @item :data @var{data}
5069 The value, @var{data}, specifies the contents of the image.
5070 There are three formats you can use for @var{data}:
5071
5072 @itemize @bullet
5073 @item
5074 A vector of strings or bool-vectors, each specifying one line of the
5075 image. Do specify @code{:height} and @code{:width}.
5076
5077 @item
5078 A string containing the same byte sequence as an XBM file would contain.
5079 You must not specify @code{:height} and @code{:width} in this case,
5080 because omitting them is what indicates the data has the format of an
5081 XBM file. The file contents specify the height and width of the image.
5082
5083 @item
5084 A string or a bool-vector containing the bits of the image (plus perhaps
5085 some extra bits at the end that will not be used). It should contain at
5086 least @var{width} * @code{height} bits. In this case, you must specify
5087 @code{:height} and @code{:width}, both to indicate that the string
5088 contains just the bits rather than a whole XBM file, and to specify the
5089 size of the image.
5090 @end itemize
5091
5092 @item :width @var{width}
5093 The value, @var{width}, specifies the width of the image, in pixels.
5094
5095 @item :height @var{height}
5096 The value, @var{height}, specifies the height of the image, in pixels.
5097 @end table
5098
5099 @node XPM Images
5100 @subsection XPM Images
5101 @cindex XPM
5102
5103 To use XPM format, specify @code{xpm} as the image type. The
5104 additional image property @code{:color-symbols} is also meaningful with
5105 the @code{xpm} image type:
5106
5107 @table @code
5108 @item :color-symbols @var{symbols}
5109 The value, @var{symbols}, should be an alist whose elements have the
5110 form @code{(@var{name} . @var{color})}. In each element, @var{name} is
5111 the name of a color as it appears in the image file, and @var{color}
5112 specifies the actual color to use for displaying that name.
5113 @end table
5114
5115 @node PostScript Images
5116 @subsection PostScript Images
5117 @cindex postscript images
5118
5119 To use PostScript for an image, specify image type @code{postscript}.
5120 This works only if you have Ghostscript installed. You must always use
5121 these three properties:
5122
5123 @table @code
5124 @item :pt-width @var{width}
5125 The value, @var{width}, specifies the width of the image measured in
5126 points (1/72 inch). @var{width} must be an integer.
5127
5128 @item :pt-height @var{height}
5129 The value, @var{height}, specifies the height of the image in points
5130 (1/72 inch). @var{height} must be an integer.
5131
5132 @item :bounding-box @var{box}
5133 The value, @var{box}, must be a list or vector of four integers, which
5134 specifying the bounding box of the PostScript image, analogous to the
5135 @samp{BoundingBox} comment found in PostScript files.
5136
5137 @example
5138 %%BoundingBox: 22 171 567 738
5139 @end example
5140 @end table
5141
5142 @node ImageMagick Images
5143 @subsection ImageMagick Images
5144 @cindex ImageMagick images
5145 @cindex images, support for more formats
5146
5147 If you build Emacs with ImageMagick support, you can use the
5148 ImageMagick library to load many image formats (@pxref{File
5149 Conveniences,,, emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}). The image type symbol
5150 for images loaded via ImageMagick is @code{imagemagick}, regardless of
5151 the actual underlying image format.
5152
5153 @defun imagemagick-types
5154 This function returns a list of image file extensions supported by the
5155 current ImageMagick installation. Each list element is a symbol
5156 representing an internal ImageMagick name for an image type, such as
5157 @code{BMP} for @file{.bmp} images.
5158 @end defun
5159
5160 @defopt imagemagick-enabled-types
5161 The value of this variable is a list of ImageMagick image types which
5162 Emacs may attempt to render using ImageMagick. Each list element
5163 should be one of the symbols in the list returned by
5164 @code{imagemagick-types}, or an equivalent string. Alternatively, a
5165 value of @code{t} enables ImageMagick for all possible image types.
5166 Regardless of the value of this variable,
5167 @code{imagemagick-types-inhibit} (see below) takes precedence.
5168 @end defopt
5169
5170 @defopt imagemagick-types-inhibit
5171 The value of this variable lists the ImageMagick image types which
5172 should never be rendered using ImageMagick, regardless of the value of
5173 @code{imagemagick-enabled-types}. A value of @code{t} disables
5174 ImageMagick entirely.
5175 @end defopt
5176
5177 @defvar image-format-suffixes
5178 This variable is an alist mapping image types to file name extensions.
5179 Emacs uses this in conjunction with the @code{:format} image property
5180 (see below) to give a hint to the ImageMagick library as to the type
5181 of an image. Each element has the form @code{(@var{type}
5182 @var{extension})}, where @var{type} is a symbol specifying an image
5183 content-type, and @var{extension} is a string that specifies the
5184 associated file name extension.
5185 @end defvar
5186
5187 Images loaded with ImageMagick support the following additional
5188 image descriptor properties:
5189
5190 @table @code
5191 @item :background @var{background}
5192 @var{background}, if non-@code{nil}, should be a string specifying a
5193 color, which is used as the image's background color if the image
5194 supports transparency. If the value is @code{nil}, it defaults to the
5195 frame's background color.
5196
5197 @item :width @var{width}, :height @var{height}
5198 The @code{:width} and @code{:height} keywords are used for scaling the
5199 image. If only one of them is specified, the other one will be
5200 calculated so as to preserve the aspect ratio. If both are specified,
5201 aspect ratio may not be preserved.
5202
5203 @item :max-width @var{max-width}, :max-height @var{max-height}
5204 The @code{:max-width} and @code{:max-height} keywords are used for
5205 scaling if the size of the image of the image exceeds these values.
5206 If @code{:width} is set it will have precedence over @code{max-width},
5207 and if @code{:height} is set it will have precedence over
5208 @code{max-height}, but you can otherwise mix these keywords as you
5209 wish. @code{:max-width} and @code{:max-height} will always preserve
5210 the aspect ratio.
5211
5212 @item :format @var{type}
5213 The value, @var{type}, should be a symbol specifying the type of the
5214 image data, as found in @code{image-format-suffixes}. This is used
5215 when the image does not have an associated file name, to provide a
5216 hint to ImageMagick to help it detect the image type.
5217
5218 @item :rotation @var{angle}
5219 Specifies a rotation angle in degrees.
5220
5221 @item :index @var{frame}
5222 @c Doesn't work: http://debbugs.gnu.org/7978
5223 @xref{Multi-Frame Images}.
5224 @end table
5225
5226 @node Other Image Types
5227 @subsection Other Image Types
5228 @cindex PBM
5229
5230 For PBM images, specify image type @code{pbm}. Color, gray-scale and
5231 monochromatic images are supported. For mono PBM images, two additional
5232 image properties are supported.
5233
5234 @table @code
5235 @item :foreground @var{foreground}
5236 The value, @var{foreground}, should be a string specifying the image
5237 foreground color, or @code{nil} for the default color. This color is
5238 used for each pixel in the PBM that is 1. The default is the frame's
5239 foreground color.
5240
5241 @item :background @var{background}
5242 The value, @var{background}, should be a string specifying the image
5243 background color, or @code{nil} for the default color. This color is
5244 used for each pixel in the PBM that is 0. The default is the frame's
5245 background color.
5246 @end table
5247
5248 @noindent
5249 The remaining image types that Emacs can support are:
5250
5251 @table @asis
5252 @item GIF
5253 Image type @code{gif}.
5254 Supports the @code{:index} property. @xref{Multi-Frame Images}.
5255
5256 @item JPEG
5257 Image type @code{jpeg}.
5258
5259 @item PNG
5260 Image type @code{png}.
5261
5262 @item SVG
5263 Image type @code{svg}.
5264
5265 @item TIFF
5266 Image type @code{tiff}.
5267 Supports the @code{:index} property. @xref{Multi-Frame Images}.
5268 @end table
5269
5270 @node Defining Images
5271 @subsection Defining Images
5272 @cindex define image
5273
5274 The functions @code{create-image}, @code{defimage} and
5275 @code{find-image} provide convenient ways to create image descriptors.
5276
5277 @defun create-image file-or-data &optional type data-p &rest props
5278 This function creates and returns an image descriptor which uses the
5279 data in @var{file-or-data}. @var{file-or-data} can be a file name or
5280 a string containing the image data; @var{data-p} should be @code{nil}
5281 for the former case, non-@code{nil} for the latter case.
5282
5283 The optional argument @var{type} is a symbol specifying the image type.
5284 If @var{type} is omitted or @code{nil}, @code{create-image} tries to
5285 determine the image type from the file's first few bytes, or else
5286 from the file's name.
5287
5288 The remaining arguments, @var{props}, specify additional image
5289 properties---for example,
5290
5291 @c ':heuristic-mask' is not documented?
5292 @example
5293 (create-image "foo.xpm" 'xpm nil :heuristic-mask t)
5294 @end example
5295
5296 The function returns @code{nil} if images of this type are not
5297 supported. Otherwise it returns an image descriptor.
5298 @end defun
5299
5300 @defmac defimage symbol specs &optional doc
5301 This macro defines @var{symbol} as an image name. The arguments
5302 @var{specs} is a list which specifies how to display the image.
5303 The third argument, @var{doc}, is an optional documentation string.
5304
5305 Each argument in @var{specs} has the form of a property list, and each
5306 one should specify at least the @code{:type} property and either the
5307 @code{:file} or the @code{:data} property. The value of @code{:type}
5308 should be a symbol specifying the image type, the value of
5309 @code{:file} is the file to load the image from, and the value of
5310 @code{:data} is a string containing the actual image data. Here is an
5311 example:
5312
5313 @example
5314 (defimage test-image
5315 ((:type xpm :file "~/test1.xpm")
5316 (:type xbm :file "~/test1.xbm")))
5317 @end example
5318
5319 @code{defimage} tests each argument, one by one, to see if it is
5320 usable---that is, if the type is supported and the file exists. The
5321 first usable argument is used to make an image descriptor which is
5322 stored in @var{symbol}.
5323
5324 If none of the alternatives will work, then @var{symbol} is defined
5325 as @code{nil}.
5326 @end defmac
5327
5328 @defun find-image specs
5329 This function provides a convenient way to find an image satisfying one
5330 of a list of image specifications @var{specs}.
5331
5332 Each specification in @var{specs} is a property list with contents
5333 depending on image type. All specifications must at least contain the
5334 properties @code{:type @var{type}} and either @w{@code{:file @var{file}}}
5335 or @w{@code{:data @var{data}}}, where @var{type} is a symbol specifying
5336 the image type, e.g., @code{xbm}, @var{file} is the file to load the
5337 image from, and @var{data} is a string containing the actual image data.
5338 The first specification in the list whose @var{type} is supported, and
5339 @var{file} exists, is used to construct the image specification to be
5340 returned. If no specification is satisfied, @code{nil} is returned.
5341
5342 The image is looked for in @code{image-load-path}.
5343 @end defun
5344
5345 @defopt image-load-path
5346 This variable's value is a list of locations in which to search for
5347 image files. If an element is a string or a variable symbol whose
5348 value is a string, the string is taken to be the name of a directory
5349 to search. If an element is a variable symbol whose value is a list,
5350 that is taken to be a list of directory names to search.
5351
5352 The default is to search in the @file{images} subdirectory of the
5353 directory specified by @code{data-directory}, then the directory
5354 specified by @code{data-directory}, and finally in the directories in
5355 @code{load-path}. Subdirectories are not automatically included in
5356 the search, so if you put an image file in a subdirectory, you have to
5357 supply the subdirectory name explicitly. For example, to find the
5358 image @file{images/foo/bar.xpm} within @code{data-directory}, you
5359 should specify the image as follows:
5360
5361 @example
5362 (defimage foo-image '((:type xpm :file "foo/bar.xpm")))
5363 @end example
5364 @end defopt
5365
5366 @defun image-load-path-for-library library image &optional path no-error
5367 This function returns a suitable search path for images used by the
5368 Lisp package @var{library}.
5369
5370 The function searches for @var{image} first using @code{image-load-path},
5371 excluding @file{@code{data-directory}/images}, and then in
5372 @code{load-path}, followed by a path suitable for @var{library}, which
5373 includes @file{../../etc/images} and @file{../etc/images} relative to
5374 the library file itself, and finally in
5375 @file{@code{data-directory}/images}.
5376
5377 Then this function returns a list of directories which contains first
5378 the directory in which @var{image} was found, followed by the value of
5379 @code{load-path}. If @var{path} is given, it is used instead of
5380 @code{load-path}.
5381
5382 If @var{no-error} is non-@code{nil} and a suitable path can't be
5383 found, don't signal an error. Instead, return a list of directories as
5384 before, except that @code{nil} appears in place of the image directory.
5385
5386 Here is an example of using @code{image-load-path-for-library}:
5387
5388 @example
5389 (defvar image-load-path) ; shush compiler
5390 (let* ((load-path (image-load-path-for-library
5391 "mh-e" "mh-logo.xpm"))
5392 (image-load-path (cons (car load-path)
5393 image-load-path)))
5394 (mh-tool-bar-folder-buttons-init))
5395 @end example
5396 @end defun
5397
5398 @node Showing Images
5399 @subsection Showing Images
5400 @cindex show image
5401
5402 You can use an image descriptor by setting up the @code{display}
5403 property yourself, but it is easier to use the functions in this
5404 section.
5405
5406 @defun insert-image image &optional string area slice
5407 This function inserts @var{image} in the current buffer at point. The
5408 value @var{image} should be an image descriptor; it could be a value
5409 returned by @code{create-image}, or the value of a symbol defined with
5410 @code{defimage}. The argument @var{string} specifies the text to put
5411 in the buffer to hold the image. If it is omitted or @code{nil},
5412 @code{insert-image} uses @code{" "} by default.
5413
5414 The argument @var{area} specifies whether to put the image in a margin.
5415 If it is @code{left-margin}, the image appears in the left margin;
5416 @code{right-margin} specifies the right margin. If @var{area} is
5417 @code{nil} or omitted, the image is displayed at point within the
5418 buffer's text.
5419
5420 The argument @var{slice} specifies a slice of the image to insert. If
5421 @var{slice} is @code{nil} or omitted the whole image is inserted.
5422 Otherwise, @var{slice} is a list @code{(@var{x} @var{y} @var{width}
5423 @var{height})} which specifies the @var{x} and @var{y} positions and
5424 @var{width} and @var{height} of the image area to insert. Integer
5425 values are in units of pixels. A floating-point number in the range
5426 0.0--1.0 stands for that fraction of the width or height of the entire
5427 image.
5428
5429 Internally, this function inserts @var{string} in the buffer, and gives
5430 it a @code{display} property which specifies @var{image}. @xref{Display
5431 Property}.
5432 @end defun
5433
5434 @cindex slice, image
5435 @cindex image slice
5436 @defun insert-sliced-image image &optional string area rows cols
5437 This function inserts @var{image} in the current buffer at point, like
5438 @code{insert-image}, but splits the image into @var{rows}x@var{cols}
5439 equally sized slices.
5440
5441 Emacs displays each slice as a
5442 separate image, and allows more intuitive scrolling up/down, instead of
5443 jumping up/down the entire image when paging through a buffer that
5444 displays (large) images.
5445 @end defun
5446
5447 @defun put-image image pos &optional string area
5448 This function puts image @var{image} in front of @var{pos} in the
5449 current buffer. The argument @var{pos} should be an integer or a
5450 marker. It specifies the buffer position where the image should appear.
5451 The argument @var{string} specifies the text that should hold the image
5452 as an alternative to the default.
5453
5454 The argument @var{image} must be an image descriptor, perhaps returned
5455 by @code{create-image} or stored by @code{defimage}.
5456
5457 The argument @var{area} specifies whether to put the image in a margin.
5458 If it is @code{left-margin}, the image appears in the left margin;
5459 @code{right-margin} specifies the right margin. If @var{area} is
5460 @code{nil} or omitted, the image is displayed at point within the
5461 buffer's text.
5462
5463 Internally, this function creates an overlay, and gives it a
5464 @code{before-string} property containing text that has a @code{display}
5465 property whose value is the image. (Whew!)
5466 @end defun
5467
5468 @defun remove-images start end &optional buffer
5469 This function removes images in @var{buffer} between positions
5470 @var{start} and @var{end}. If @var{buffer} is omitted or @code{nil},
5471 images are removed from the current buffer.
5472
5473 This removes only images that were put into @var{buffer} the way
5474 @code{put-image} does it, not images that were inserted with
5475 @code{insert-image} or in other ways.
5476 @end defun
5477
5478 @defun image-size spec &optional pixels frame
5479 @cindex size of image
5480 This function returns the size of an image as a pair
5481 @w{@code{(@var{width} . @var{height})}}. @var{spec} is an image
5482 specification. @var{pixels} non-@code{nil} means return sizes measured
5483 in pixels, otherwise return sizes measured in the default character size
5484 of @var{frame} (@pxref{Frame Font}). @var{frame} is the frame on which
5485 the image will be displayed. @var{frame} null or omitted means use the
5486 selected frame (@pxref{Input Focus}).
5487 @end defun
5488
5489 @defvar max-image-size
5490 This variable is used to define the maximum size of image that Emacs
5491 will load. Emacs will refuse to load (and display) any image that is
5492 larger than this limit.
5493
5494 If the value is an integer, it directly specifies the maximum
5495 image height and width, measured in pixels. If it is floating
5496 point, it specifies the maximum image height and width
5497 as a ratio to the frame height and width. If the value is
5498 non-numeric, there is no explicit limit on the size of images.
5499
5500 The purpose of this variable is to prevent unreasonably large images
5501 from accidentally being loaded into Emacs. It only takes effect the
5502 first time an image is loaded. Once an image is placed in the image
5503 cache, it can always be displayed, even if the value of
5504 @code{max-image-size} is subsequently changed (@pxref{Image Cache}).
5505 @end defvar
5506
5507 @node Multi-Frame Images
5508 @subsection Multi-Frame Images
5509 @cindex multi-frame images
5510
5511 @cindex animation
5512 @cindex image animation
5513 @cindex image frames
5514 Some image files can contain more than one image. We say that there
5515 are multiple ``frames'' in the image. At present, Emacs supports
5516 multiple frames for GIF, TIFF, and certain ImageMagick formats such as
5517 DJVM@.
5518
5519 The frames can be used either to represent multiple pages (this is
5520 usually the case with multi-frame TIFF files, for example), or to
5521 create animation (usually the case with multi-frame GIF files).
5522
5523 A multi-frame image has a property @code{:index}, whose value is an
5524 integer (counting from 0) that specifies which frame is being displayed.
5525
5526 @defun image-multi-frame-p image
5527 This function returns non-@code{nil} if @var{image} contains more than
5528 one frame. The actual return value is a cons @code{(@var{nimages}
5529 . @var{delay})}, where @var{nimages} is the number of frames and
5530 @var{delay} is the delay in seconds between them, or @code{nil}
5531 if the image does not specify a delay. Images that are intended to be
5532 animated usually specify a frame delay, whereas ones that are intended
5533 to be treated as multiple pages do not.
5534 @end defun
5535
5536 @defun image-current-frame image
5537 This function returns the index of the current frame number for
5538 @var{image}, counting from 0.
5539 @end defun
5540
5541 @defun image-show-frame image n &optional nocheck
5542 This function switches @var{image} to frame number @var{n}. It
5543 replaces a frame number outside the valid range with that of the end
5544 of the range, unless @var{nocheck} is non-@code{nil}. If @var{image}
5545 does not contain a frame with the specified number, the image displays
5546 as a hollow box.
5547 @end defun
5548
5549 @defun image-animate image &optional index limit
5550 This function animates @var{image}. The optional integer @var{index}
5551 specifies the frame from which to start (default 0). The optional
5552 argument @var{limit} controls the length of the animation. If omitted
5553 or @code{nil}, the image animates once only; if @code{t} it loops
5554 forever; if a number animation stops after that many seconds.
5555 @end defun
5556
5557 @vindex image-minimum-frame-delay
5558 @vindex image-default-frame-delay
5559 @noindent Animation operates by means of a timer. Note that Emacs imposes a
5560 minimum frame delay of 0.01 (@code{image-minimum-frame-delay}) seconds.
5561 If the image itself does not specify a delay, Emacs uses
5562 @code{image-default-frame-delay}.
5563
5564 @defun image-animate-timer image
5565 This function returns the timer responsible for animating @var{image},
5566 if there is one.
5567 @end defun
5568
5569
5570 @node Image Cache
5571 @subsection Image Cache
5572 @cindex image cache
5573
5574 Emacs caches images so that it can display them again more
5575 efficiently. When Emacs displays an image, it searches the image
5576 cache for an existing image specification @code{equal} to the desired
5577 specification. If a match is found, the image is displayed from the
5578 cache. Otherwise, Emacs loads the image normally.
5579
5580 @defun image-flush spec &optional frame
5581 This function removes the image with specification @var{spec} from the
5582 image cache of frame @var{frame}. Image specifications are compared
5583 using @code{equal}. If @var{frame} is @code{nil}, it defaults to the
5584 selected frame. If @var{frame} is @code{t}, the image is flushed on
5585 all existing frames.
5586
5587 In Emacs's current implementation, each graphical terminal possesses an
5588 image cache, which is shared by all the frames on that terminal
5589 (@pxref{Multiple Terminals}). Thus, refreshing an image in one frame
5590 also refreshes it in all other frames on the same terminal.
5591 @end defun
5592
5593 One use for @code{image-flush} is to tell Emacs about a change in an
5594 image file. If an image specification contains a @code{:file}
5595 property, the image is cached based on the file's contents when the
5596 image is first displayed. Even if the file subsequently changes,
5597 Emacs continues displaying the old version of the image. Calling
5598 @code{image-flush} flushes the image from the cache, forcing Emacs to
5599 re-read the file the next time it needs to display that image.
5600
5601 Another use for @code{image-flush} is for memory conservation. If
5602 your Lisp program creates a large number of temporary images over a
5603 period much shorter than @code{image-cache-eviction-delay} (see
5604 below), you can opt to flush unused images yourself, instead of
5605 waiting for Emacs to do it automatically.
5606
5607 @defun clear-image-cache &optional filter
5608 This function clears an image cache, removing all the images stored in
5609 it. If @var{filter} is omitted or @code{nil}, it clears the cache for
5610 the selected frame. If @var{filter} is a frame, it clears the cache
5611 for that frame. If @var{filter} is @code{t}, all image caches are
5612 cleared. Otherwise, @var{filter} is taken to be a file name, and all
5613 images associated with that file name are removed from all image
5614 caches.
5615 @end defun
5616
5617 If an image in the image cache has not been displayed for a specified
5618 period of time, Emacs removes it from the cache and frees the
5619 associated memory.
5620
5621 @defvar image-cache-eviction-delay
5622 This variable specifies the number of seconds an image can remain in
5623 the cache without being displayed. When an image is not displayed for
5624 this length of time, Emacs removes it from the image cache.
5625
5626 Under some circumstances, if the number of images in the cache grows
5627 too large, the actual eviction delay may be shorter than this.
5628
5629 If the value is @code{nil}, Emacs does not remove images from the cache
5630 except when you explicitly clear it. This mode can be useful for
5631 debugging.
5632 @end defvar
5633
5634 @node Xwidgets
5635 @section Embedded Native Widgets
5636 @cindex xwidget
5637 @cindex embedded widgets
5638 @cindex webkit browser widget
5639
5640 Emacs is able to display native widgets, such as GTK WebKit widgets,
5641 in Emacs buffers when it was built with the necessary support
5642 libraries and is running on a graphical terminal. To test whether
5643 Emacs supports display of embedded widgets, check that the
5644 @code{xwidget-internal} feature is available (@pxref{Named Features}).
5645
5646 To display an embedded widget in a buffer, you must first create an
5647 xwidget object, and then use that object as the display specifier
5648 in a @code{display} text or overlay property (@pxref{Display
5649 Property}).
5650
5651 @defun make-xwidget type title width height arguments &optional buffer
5652 This creates and returns an xwidget object. If
5653 @var{buffer} is omitted or @code{nil}, it defaults to the current
5654 buffer. If @var{buffer} names a buffer that doesn't exist, it will be
5655 created. The @var{type} identifies the type of the xwidget component,
5656 it can be one of the following:
5657
5658 @table @code
5659 @item webkit
5660 The WebKit component.
5661 @end table
5662
5663 The @var{width} and @var{height} arguments specify the widget size in
5664 pixels, and @var{title}, a string, specifies its title.
5665 @end defun
5666
5667 @defun xwidgetp object
5668 This function returns @code{t} if @var{object} is an xwidget,
5669 @code{nil} otherwise.
5670 @end defun
5671
5672 @defun xwidget-plist xwidget
5673 This function returns the property list of @var{xwidget}.
5674 @end defun
5675
5676 @defun set-xwidget-plist xwidget plist
5677 This function replaces the property list of @var{xwidget} with a new
5678 property list given by @var{plist}.
5679 @end defun
5680
5681 @defun xwidget-buffer xwidget
5682 This function returns the buffer of @var{xwidget}.
5683 @end defun
5684
5685 @defun get-buffer-xwidgets buffer
5686 This function returns a list of xwidget objects associated with the
5687 @var{buffer}, which can be specified as a buffer object or a name of
5688 an existing buffer, a string. The value is @code{nil} if @var{buffer}
5689 contains no xwidgets.
5690 @end defun
5691
5692 @defun xwidget-webkit-goto-uri xwidget uri
5693 This function browses the specified @var{uri} in the given
5694 @var{xwidget}. The @var{uri} is a string that specifies the name of a
5695 file or a URL. @c FIXME: What else can a URI specify in this context?
5696 @end defun
5697
5698 @defun xwidget-webkit-execute-script xwidget script
5699 This function causes the browser widget specified by @var{xwidget} to
5700 execute the specified JavaScript @code{script}.
5701 @end defun
5702
5703 @defun xwidget-webkit-execute-script-rv xwidget script &optional default
5704 This function executes the specified @var{script} like
5705 @code{xwidget-webkit-execute-script} does, but it also returns the
5706 script's return value as a string. If @var{script} doesn't return a
5707 value, this function returns @var{default}, or @code{nil} if
5708 @var{default} was omitted.
5709 @end defun
5710
5711 @defun xwidget-webkit-get-title xwidget
5712 This function returns the title of @var{xwidget} as a string.
5713 @end defun
5714
5715 @defun xwidget-resize xwidget width height
5716 This function resizes the specified @var{xwidget} to the size
5717 @var{width}x@var{height} pixels.
5718 @end defun
5719
5720 @defun xwidget-size-request xwidget
5721 This function returns the desired size of @var{xwidget} as a list of
5722 the form @code{(@var{width} @var{height})}. The dimensions are in
5723 pixels.
5724 @end defun
5725
5726 @defun xwidget-info xwidget
5727 This function returns the attributes of @var{xwidget} as a vector of
5728 the form @code{[@var{type} @var{title} @var{width} @var{height}]}.
5729 The attributes are usually determined by @code{make-xwidget} when the
5730 xwidget is created.
5731 @end defun
5732
5733 @defun set-xwidget-query-on-exit-flag xwidget flag
5734 This function allows you to arrange that Emacs will ask the user for
5735 confirmation before exiting or before killing a buffer that has
5736 @var{xwidget} associated with it. If @var{flag} is non-@code{nil},
5737 Emacs will query the user, otherwise it will not.
5738 @end defun
5739
5740 @defun xwidget-query-on-exit-flag xwidget
5741 This function returns the current setting of @var{xwidget}s
5742 query-on-exit flag, either @code{t} or @code{nil}.
5743 @end defun
5744
5745 @node Buttons
5746 @section Buttons
5747 @cindex buttons in buffers
5748 @cindex clickable buttons in buffers
5749
5750 The Button package defines functions for inserting and manipulating
5751 @dfn{buttons} that can be activated with the mouse or via keyboard
5752 commands. These buttons are typically used for various kinds of
5753 hyperlinks.
5754
5755 A button is essentially a set of text or overlay properties,
5756 attached to a stretch of text in a buffer. These properties are
5757 called @dfn{button properties}. One of these properties, the
5758 @dfn{action property}, specifies a function which is called when the
5759 user invokes the button using the keyboard or the mouse. The action
5760 function may examine the button and use its other properties as
5761 desired.
5762
5763 In some ways, the Button package duplicates the functionality in the
5764 Widget package. @xref{Top, , Introduction, widget, The Emacs Widget
5765 Library}. The advantage of the Button package is that it is faster,
5766 smaller, and simpler to program. From the point of view of the user,
5767 the interfaces produced by the two packages are very similar.
5768
5769 @menu
5770 * Button Properties:: Button properties with special meanings.
5771 * Button Types:: Defining common properties for classes of buttons.
5772 * Making Buttons:: Adding buttons to Emacs buffers.
5773 * Manipulating Buttons:: Getting and setting properties of buttons.
5774 * Button Buffer Commands:: Buffer-wide commands and bindings for buttons.
5775 @end menu
5776
5777 @node Button Properties
5778 @subsection Button Properties
5779 @cindex button properties
5780
5781 Each button has an associated list of properties defining its
5782 appearance and behavior, and other arbitrary properties may be used
5783 for application specific purposes. The following properties have
5784 special meaning to the Button package:
5785
5786 @table @code
5787 @item action
5788 @kindex action @r{(button property)}
5789 The function to call when the user invokes the button, which is passed
5790 the single argument @var{button}. By default this is @code{ignore},
5791 which does nothing.
5792
5793 @item mouse-action
5794 @kindex mouse-action @r{(button property)}
5795 This is similar to @code{action}, and when present, will be used
5796 instead of @code{action} for button invocations resulting from
5797 mouse-clicks (instead of the user hitting @key{RET}). If not
5798 present, mouse-clicks use @code{action} instead.
5799
5800 @item face
5801 @kindex face @r{(button property)}
5802 This is an Emacs face controlling how buttons of this type are
5803 displayed; by default this is the @code{button} face.
5804
5805 @item mouse-face
5806 @kindex mouse-face @r{(button property)}
5807 This is an additional face which controls appearance during
5808 mouse-overs (merged with the usual button face); by default this is
5809 the usual Emacs @code{highlight} face.
5810
5811 @item keymap
5812 @kindex keymap @r{(button property)}
5813 The button's keymap, defining bindings active within the button
5814 region. By default this is the usual button region keymap, stored
5815 in the variable @code{button-map}, which defines @key{RET} and
5816 @key{mouse-2} to invoke the button.
5817
5818 @item type
5819 @kindex type @r{(button property)}
5820 The button type. @xref{Button Types}.
5821
5822 @item help-echo
5823 @kindex help-index @r{(button property)}
5824 A string displayed by the Emacs tool-tip help system; by default,
5825 @code{"mouse-2, RET: Push this button"}.
5826
5827 @item follow-link
5828 @kindex follow-link @r{(button property)}
5829 The follow-link property, defining how a @key{mouse-1} click behaves
5830 on this button, @xref{Clickable Text}.
5831
5832 @item button
5833 @kindex button @r{(button property)}
5834 All buttons have a non-@code{nil} @code{button} property, which may be useful
5835 in finding regions of text that comprise buttons (which is what the
5836 standard button functions do).
5837 @end table
5838
5839 There are other properties defined for the regions of text in a
5840 button, but these are not generally interesting for typical uses.
5841
5842 @node Button Types
5843 @subsection Button Types
5844 @cindex button types
5845
5846 Every button has a @dfn{button type}, which defines default values
5847 for the button's properties. Button types are arranged in a
5848 hierarchy, with specialized types inheriting from more general types,
5849 so that it's easy to define special-purpose types of buttons for
5850 specific tasks.
5851
5852 @defun define-button-type name &rest properties
5853 Define a button type called @var{name} (a symbol).
5854 The remaining arguments
5855 form a sequence of @var{property value} pairs, specifying default
5856 property values for buttons with this type (a button's type may be set
5857 by giving it a @code{type} property when creating the button, using
5858 the @code{:type} keyword argument).
5859
5860 In addition, the keyword argument @code{:supertype} may be used to
5861 specify a button-type from which @var{name} inherits its default
5862 property values. Note that this inheritance happens only when
5863 @var{name} is defined; subsequent changes to a supertype are not
5864 reflected in its subtypes.
5865 @end defun
5866
5867 Using @code{define-button-type} to define default properties for
5868 buttons is not necessary---buttons without any specified type use the
5869 built-in button-type @code{button}---but it is encouraged, since
5870 doing so usually makes the resulting code clearer and more efficient.
5871
5872 @node Making Buttons
5873 @subsection Making Buttons
5874 @cindex making buttons
5875
5876 Buttons are associated with a region of text, using an overlay or
5877 text properties to hold button-specific information, all of which are
5878 initialized from the button's type (which defaults to the built-in
5879 button type @code{button}). Like all Emacs text, the appearance of
5880 the button is governed by the @code{face} property; by default (via
5881 the @code{face} property inherited from the @code{button} button-type)
5882 this is a simple underline, like a typical web-page link.
5883
5884 For convenience, there are two sorts of button-creation functions,
5885 those that add button properties to an existing region of a buffer,
5886 called @code{make-...button}, and those that also insert the button
5887 text, called @code{insert-...button}.
5888
5889 The button-creation functions all take the @code{&rest} argument
5890 @var{properties}, which should be a sequence of @var{property value}
5891 pairs, specifying properties to add to the button; see @ref{Button
5892 Properties}. In addition, the keyword argument @code{:type} may be
5893 used to specify a button-type from which to inherit other properties;
5894 see @ref{Button Types}. Any properties not explicitly specified
5895 during creation will be inherited from the button's type (if the type
5896 defines such a property).
5897
5898 The following functions add a button using an overlay
5899 (@pxref{Overlays}) to hold the button properties:
5900
5901 @defun make-button beg end &rest properties
5902 This makes a button from @var{beg} to @var{end} in the
5903 current buffer, and returns it.
5904 @end defun
5905
5906 @defun insert-button label &rest properties
5907 This insert a button with the label @var{label} at point,
5908 and returns it.
5909 @end defun
5910
5911 The following functions are similar, but using text properties
5912 (@pxref{Text Properties}) to hold the button properties. Such buttons
5913 do not add markers to the buffer, so editing in the buffer does not
5914 slow down if there is an extremely large numbers of buttons. However,
5915 if there is an existing face text property on the text (e.g., a face
5916 assigned by Font Lock mode), the button face may not be visible. Both
5917 of these functions return the starting position of the new button.
5918
5919 @defun make-text-button beg end &rest properties
5920 This makes a button from @var{beg} to @var{end} in the current buffer,
5921 using text properties.
5922 @end defun
5923
5924 @defun insert-text-button label &rest properties
5925 This inserts a button with the label @var{label} at point, using text
5926 properties.
5927 @end defun
5928
5929 @node Manipulating Buttons
5930 @subsection Manipulating Buttons
5931 @cindex manipulating buttons
5932
5933 These are functions for getting and setting properties of buttons.
5934 Often these are used by a button's invocation function to determine
5935 what to do.
5936
5937 Where a @var{button} parameter is specified, it means an object
5938 referring to a specific button, either an overlay (for overlay
5939 buttons), or a buffer-position or marker (for text property buttons).
5940 Such an object is passed as the first argument to a button's
5941 invocation function when it is invoked.
5942
5943 @defun button-start button
5944 Return the position at which @var{button} starts.
5945 @end defun
5946
5947 @defun button-end button
5948 Return the position at which @var{button} ends.
5949 @end defun
5950
5951 @defun button-get button prop
5952 Get the property of button @var{button} named @var{prop}.
5953 @end defun
5954
5955 @defun button-put button prop val
5956 Set @var{button}'s @var{prop} property to @var{val}.
5957 @end defun
5958
5959 @defun button-activate button &optional use-mouse-action
5960 Call @var{button}'s @code{action} property (i.e., invoke the function
5961 that is the value of that property, passing it the single argument
5962 @var{button}). If @var{use-mouse-action} is non-@code{nil}, try to
5963 invoke the button's @code{mouse-action} property instead of
5964 @code{action}; if the button has no @code{mouse-action} property, use
5965 @code{action} as normal.
5966 @end defun
5967
5968 @defun button-label button
5969 Return @var{button}'s text label.
5970 @end defun
5971
5972 @defun button-type button
5973 Return @var{button}'s button-type.
5974 @end defun
5975
5976 @defun button-has-type-p button type
5977 Return @code{t} if @var{button} has button-type @var{type}, or one of
5978 @var{type}'s subtypes.
5979 @end defun
5980
5981 @defun button-at pos
5982 Return the button at position @var{pos} in the current buffer, or
5983 @code{nil}. If the button at @var{pos} is a text property button, the
5984 return value is a marker pointing to @var{pos}.
5985 @end defun
5986
5987 @defun button-type-put type prop val
5988 Set the button-type @var{type}'s @var{prop} property to @var{val}.
5989 @end defun
5990
5991 @defun button-type-get type prop
5992 Get the property of button-type @var{type} named @var{prop}.
5993 @end defun
5994
5995 @defun button-type-subtype-p type supertype
5996 Return @code{t} if button-type @var{type} is a subtype of @var{supertype}.
5997 @end defun
5998
5999 @node Button Buffer Commands
6000 @subsection Button Buffer Commands
6001 @cindex button buffer commands
6002
6003 These are commands and functions for locating and operating on
6004 buttons in an Emacs buffer.
6005
6006 @code{push-button} is the command that a user uses to actually push
6007 a button, and is bound by default in the button itself to @key{RET}
6008 and to @key{mouse-2} using a local keymap in the button's overlay or
6009 text properties. Commands that are useful outside the buttons itself,
6010 such as @code{forward-button} and @code{backward-button} are
6011 additionally available in the keymap stored in
6012 @code{button-buffer-map}; a mode which uses buttons may want to use
6013 @code{button-buffer-map} as a parent keymap for its keymap.
6014
6015 If the button has a non-@code{nil} @code{follow-link} property, and
6016 @code{mouse-1-click-follows-link} is set, a quick @key{mouse-1} click
6017 will also activate the @code{push-button} command.
6018 @xref{Clickable Text}.
6019
6020 @deffn Command push-button &optional pos use-mouse-action
6021 Perform the action specified by a button at location @var{pos}.
6022 @var{pos} may be either a buffer position or a mouse-event. If
6023 @var{use-mouse-action} is non-@code{nil}, or @var{pos} is a
6024 mouse-event (@pxref{Mouse Events}), try to invoke the button's
6025 @code{mouse-action} property instead of @code{action}; if the button
6026 has no @code{mouse-action} property, use @code{action} as normal.
6027 @var{pos} defaults to point, except when @code{push-button} is invoked
6028 interactively as the result of a mouse-event, in which case, the mouse
6029 event's position is used. If there's no button at @var{pos}, do
6030 nothing and return @code{nil}, otherwise return @code{t}.
6031 @end deffn
6032
6033 @deffn Command forward-button n &optional wrap display-message
6034 Move to the @var{n}th next button, or @var{n}th previous button if
6035 @var{n} is negative. If @var{n} is zero, move to the start of any
6036 button at point. If @var{wrap} is non-@code{nil}, moving past either
6037 end of the buffer continues from the other end. If
6038 @var{display-message} is non-@code{nil}, the button's help-echo string
6039 is displayed. Any button with a non-@code{nil} @code{skip} property
6040 is skipped over. Returns the button found.
6041 @end deffn
6042
6043 @deffn Command backward-button n &optional wrap display-message
6044 Move to the @var{n}th previous button, or @var{n}th next button if
6045 @var{n} is negative. If @var{n} is zero, move to the start of any
6046 button at point. If @var{wrap} is non-@code{nil}, moving past either
6047 end of the buffer continues from the other end. If
6048 @var{display-message} is non-@code{nil}, the button's help-echo string
6049 is displayed. Any button with a non-@code{nil} @code{skip} property
6050 is skipped over. Returns the button found.
6051 @end deffn
6052
6053 @defun next-button pos &optional count-current
6054 @defunx previous-button pos &optional count-current
6055 Return the next button after (for @code{next-button}) or before (for
6056 @code{previous-button}) position @var{pos} in the current buffer. If
6057 @var{count-current} is non-@code{nil}, count any button at @var{pos}
6058 in the search, instead of starting at the next button.
6059 @end defun
6060
6061 @node Abstract Display
6062 @section Abstract Display
6063 @cindex ewoc
6064 @cindex display, abstract
6065 @cindex display, arbitrary objects
6066 @cindex model/view/controller
6067 @cindex view part, model/view/controller
6068
6069 The Ewoc package constructs buffer text that represents a structure
6070 of Lisp objects, and updates the text to follow changes in that
6071 structure. This is like the ``view'' component in the
6072 ``model--view--controller'' design paradigm. Ewoc means ``Emacs's
6073 Widget for Object Collections''.
6074
6075 An @dfn{ewoc} is a structure that organizes information required to
6076 construct buffer text that represents certain Lisp data. The buffer
6077 text of the ewoc has three parts, in order: first, fixed @dfn{header}
6078 text; next, textual descriptions of a series of data elements (Lisp
6079 objects that you specify); and last, fixed @dfn{footer} text.
6080 Specifically, an ewoc contains information on:
6081
6082 @itemize @bullet
6083 @item
6084 The buffer which its text is generated in.
6085
6086 @item
6087 The text's start position in the buffer.
6088
6089 @item
6090 The header and footer strings.
6091
6092 @item
6093 @cindex node, ewoc
6094 @c or "@cindex node, abstract display"?
6095 A doubly-linked chain of @dfn{nodes}, each of which contains:
6096
6097 @itemize
6098 @item
6099 A @dfn{data element}, a single Lisp object.
6100
6101 @item
6102 Links to the preceding and following nodes in the chain.
6103 @end itemize
6104
6105 @item
6106 A @dfn{pretty-printer} function which is responsible for
6107 inserting the textual representation of a data
6108 element value into the current buffer.
6109 @end itemize
6110
6111 Typically, you define an ewoc with @code{ewoc-create}, and then pass
6112 the resulting ewoc structure to other functions in the Ewoc package to
6113 build nodes within it, and display it in the buffer. Once it is
6114 displayed in the buffer, other functions determine the correspondence
6115 between buffer positions and nodes, move point from one node's textual
6116 representation to another, and so forth. @xref{Abstract Display
6117 Functions}.
6118
6119 @cindex encapsulation, ewoc
6120 @c or "@cindex encapsulation, abstract display"?
6121 A node @dfn{encapsulates} a data element much the way a variable
6122 holds a value. Normally, encapsulation occurs as a part of adding a
6123 node to the ewoc. You can retrieve the data element value and place a
6124 new value in its place, like so:
6125
6126 @lisp
6127 (ewoc-data @var{node})
6128 @result{} value
6129
6130 (ewoc-set-data @var{node} @var{new-value})
6131 @result{} @var{new-value}
6132 @end lisp
6133
6134 @noindent
6135 You can also use, as the data element value, a Lisp object (list or
6136 vector) that is a container for the real value, or an index into
6137 some other structure. The example (@pxref{Abstract Display Example})
6138 uses the latter approach.
6139
6140 When the data changes, you will want to update the text in the
6141 buffer. You can update all nodes by calling @code{ewoc-refresh}, or
6142 just specific nodes using @code{ewoc-invalidate}, or all nodes
6143 satisfying a predicate using @code{ewoc-map}. Alternatively, you can
6144 delete invalid nodes using @code{ewoc-delete} or @code{ewoc-filter},
6145 and add new nodes in their place. Deleting a node from an ewoc deletes
6146 its associated textual description from buffer, as well.
6147
6148 @menu
6149 * Abstract Display Functions:: Functions in the Ewoc package.
6150 * Abstract Display Example:: Example of using Ewoc.
6151 @end menu
6152
6153 @node Abstract Display Functions
6154 @subsection Abstract Display Functions
6155
6156 In this subsection, @var{ewoc} and @var{node} stand for the
6157 structures described above (@pxref{Abstract Display}), while
6158 @var{data} stands for an arbitrary Lisp object used as a data element.
6159
6160 @defun ewoc-create pretty-printer &optional header footer nosep
6161 This constructs and returns a new ewoc, with no nodes (and thus no data
6162 elements). @var{pretty-printer} should be a function that takes one
6163 argument, a data element of the sort you plan to use in this ewoc, and
6164 inserts its textual description at point using @code{insert} (and never
6165 @code{insert-before-markers}, because that would interfere with the
6166 Ewoc package's internal mechanisms).
6167
6168 Normally, a newline is automatically inserted after the header,
6169 the footer and every node's textual description. If @var{nosep}
6170 is non-@code{nil}, no newline is inserted. This may be useful for
6171 displaying an entire ewoc on a single line, for example, or for
6172 making nodes invisible by arranging for @var{pretty-printer}
6173 to do nothing for those nodes.
6174
6175 An ewoc maintains its text in the buffer that is current when
6176 you create it, so switch to the intended buffer before calling
6177 @code{ewoc-create}.
6178 @end defun
6179
6180 @defun ewoc-buffer ewoc
6181 This returns the buffer where @var{ewoc} maintains its text.
6182 @end defun
6183
6184 @defun ewoc-get-hf ewoc
6185 This returns a cons cell @code{(@var{header} . @var{footer})}
6186 made from @var{ewoc}'s header and footer.
6187 @end defun
6188
6189 @defun ewoc-set-hf ewoc header footer
6190 This sets the header and footer of @var{ewoc} to the strings
6191 @var{header} and @var{footer}, respectively.
6192 @end defun
6193
6194 @defun ewoc-enter-first ewoc data
6195 @defunx ewoc-enter-last ewoc data
6196 These add a new node encapsulating @var{data}, putting it, respectively,
6197 at the beginning or end of @var{ewoc}'s chain of nodes.
6198 @end defun
6199
6200 @defun ewoc-enter-before ewoc node data
6201 @defunx ewoc-enter-after ewoc node data
6202 These add a new node encapsulating @var{data}, adding it to
6203 @var{ewoc} before or after @var{node}, respectively.
6204 @end defun
6205
6206 @defun ewoc-prev ewoc node
6207 @defunx ewoc-next ewoc node
6208 These return, respectively, the previous node and the next node of @var{node}
6209 in @var{ewoc}.
6210 @end defun
6211
6212 @defun ewoc-nth ewoc n
6213 This returns the node in @var{ewoc} found at zero-based index @var{n}.
6214 A negative @var{n} means count from the end. @code{ewoc-nth} returns
6215 @code{nil} if @var{n} is out of range.
6216 @end defun
6217
6218 @defun ewoc-data node
6219 This extracts the data encapsulated by @var{node} and returns it.
6220 @end defun
6221
6222 @defun ewoc-set-data node data
6223 This sets the data encapsulated by @var{node} to @var{data}.
6224 @end defun
6225
6226 @defun ewoc-locate ewoc &optional pos guess
6227 This determines the node in @var{ewoc} which contains point (or
6228 @var{pos} if specified), and returns that node. If @var{ewoc} has no
6229 nodes, it returns @code{nil}. If @var{pos} is before the first node,
6230 it returns the first node; if @var{pos} is after the last node, it returns
6231 the last node. The optional third arg @var{guess}
6232 should be a node that is likely to be near @var{pos}; this doesn't
6233 alter the result, but makes the function run faster.
6234 @end defun
6235
6236 @defun ewoc-location node
6237 This returns the start position of @var{node}.
6238 @end defun
6239
6240 @defun ewoc-goto-prev ewoc arg
6241 @defunx ewoc-goto-next ewoc arg
6242 These move point to the previous or next, respectively, @var{arg}th node
6243 in @var{ewoc}. @code{ewoc-goto-prev} does not move if it is already at
6244 the first node or if @var{ewoc} is empty, whereas @code{ewoc-goto-next}
6245 moves past the last node, returning @code{nil}. Excepting this special
6246 case, these functions return the node moved to.
6247 @end defun
6248
6249 @defun ewoc-goto-node ewoc node
6250 This moves point to the start of @var{node} in @var{ewoc}.
6251 @end defun
6252
6253 @defun ewoc-refresh ewoc
6254 This function regenerates the text of @var{ewoc}. It works by
6255 deleting the text between the header and the footer, i.e., all the
6256 data elements' representations, and then calling the pretty-printer
6257 function for each node, one by one, in order.
6258 @end defun
6259
6260 @defun ewoc-invalidate ewoc &rest nodes
6261 This is similar to @code{ewoc-refresh}, except that only @var{nodes} in
6262 @var{ewoc} are updated instead of the entire set.
6263 @end defun
6264
6265 @defun ewoc-delete ewoc &rest nodes
6266 This deletes each node in @var{nodes} from @var{ewoc}.
6267 @end defun
6268
6269 @defun ewoc-filter ewoc predicate &rest args
6270 This calls @var{predicate} for each data element in @var{ewoc} and
6271 deletes those nodes for which @var{predicate} returns @code{nil}.
6272 Any @var{args} are passed to @var{predicate}.
6273 @end defun
6274
6275 @defun ewoc-collect ewoc predicate &rest args
6276 This calls @var{predicate} for each data element in @var{ewoc}
6277 and returns a list of those elements for which @var{predicate}
6278 returns non-@code{nil}. The elements in the list are ordered
6279 as in the buffer. Any @var{args} are passed to @var{predicate}.
6280 @end defun
6281
6282 @defun ewoc-map map-function ewoc &rest args
6283 This calls @var{map-function} for each data element in @var{ewoc} and
6284 updates those nodes for which @var{map-function} returns non-@code{nil}.
6285 Any @var{args} are passed to @var{map-function}.
6286 @end defun
6287
6288 @node Abstract Display Example
6289 @subsection Abstract Display Example
6290
6291 Here is a simple example using functions of the ewoc package to
6292 implement a @dfn{color components} display, an area in a buffer that
6293 represents a vector of three integers (itself representing a 24-bit RGB
6294 value) in various ways.
6295
6296 @example
6297 (setq colorcomp-ewoc nil
6298 colorcomp-data nil
6299 colorcomp-mode-map nil
6300 colorcomp-labels ["Red" "Green" "Blue"])
6301
6302 (defun colorcomp-pp (data)
6303 (if data
6304 (let ((comp (aref colorcomp-data data)))
6305 (insert (aref colorcomp-labels data) "\t: #x"
6306 (format "%02X" comp) " "
6307 (make-string (ash comp -2) ?#) "\n"))
6308 (let ((cstr (format "#%02X%02X%02X"
6309 (aref colorcomp-data 0)
6310 (aref colorcomp-data 1)
6311 (aref colorcomp-data 2)))
6312 (samp " (sample text) "))
6313 (insert "Color\t: "
6314 (propertize samp 'face
6315 `(foreground-color . ,cstr))
6316 (propertize samp 'face
6317 `(background-color . ,cstr))
6318 "\n"))))
6319
6320 (defun colorcomp (color)
6321 "Allow fiddling with COLOR in a new buffer.
6322 The buffer is in Color Components mode."
6323 (interactive "sColor (name or #RGB or #RRGGBB): ")
6324 (when (string= "" color)
6325 (setq color "green"))
6326 (unless (color-values color)
6327 (error "No such color: %S" color))
6328 (switch-to-buffer
6329 (generate-new-buffer (format "originally: %s" color)))
6330 (kill-all-local-variables)
6331 (setq major-mode 'colorcomp-mode
6332 mode-name "Color Components")
6333 (use-local-map colorcomp-mode-map)
6334 (erase-buffer)
6335 (buffer-disable-undo)
6336 (let ((data (apply 'vector (mapcar (lambda (n) (ash n -8))
6337 (color-values color))))
6338 (ewoc (ewoc-create 'colorcomp-pp
6339 "\nColor Components\n\n"
6340 (substitute-command-keys
6341 "\n\\@{colorcomp-mode-map@}"))))
6342 (set (make-local-variable 'colorcomp-data) data)
6343 (set (make-local-variable 'colorcomp-ewoc) ewoc)
6344 (ewoc-enter-last ewoc 0)
6345 (ewoc-enter-last ewoc 1)
6346 (ewoc-enter-last ewoc 2)
6347 (ewoc-enter-last ewoc nil)))
6348 @end example
6349
6350 @cindex controller part, model/view/controller
6351 This example can be extended to be a color selection widget (in
6352 other words, the ``controller'' part of the ``model--view--controller''
6353 design paradigm) by defining commands to modify @code{colorcomp-data}
6354 and to finish the selection process, and a keymap to tie it all
6355 together conveniently.
6356
6357 @smallexample
6358 (defun colorcomp-mod (index limit delta)
6359 (let ((cur (aref colorcomp-data index)))
6360 (unless (= limit cur)
6361 (aset colorcomp-data index (+ cur delta)))
6362 (ewoc-invalidate
6363 colorcomp-ewoc
6364 (ewoc-nth colorcomp-ewoc index)
6365 (ewoc-nth colorcomp-ewoc -1))))
6366
6367 (defun colorcomp-R-more () (interactive) (colorcomp-mod 0 255 1))
6368 (defun colorcomp-G-more () (interactive) (colorcomp-mod 1 255 1))
6369 (defun colorcomp-B-more () (interactive) (colorcomp-mod 2 255 1))
6370 (defun colorcomp-R-less () (interactive) (colorcomp-mod 0 0 -1))
6371 (defun colorcomp-G-less () (interactive) (colorcomp-mod 1 0 -1))
6372 (defun colorcomp-B-less () (interactive) (colorcomp-mod 2 0 -1))
6373
6374 (defun colorcomp-copy-as-kill-and-exit ()
6375 "Copy the color components into the kill ring and kill the buffer.
6376 The string is formatted #RRGGBB (hash followed by six hex digits)."
6377 (interactive)
6378 (kill-new (format "#%02X%02X%02X"
6379 (aref colorcomp-data 0)
6380 (aref colorcomp-data 1)
6381 (aref colorcomp-data 2)))
6382 (kill-buffer nil))
6383
6384 (setq colorcomp-mode-map
6385 (let ((m (make-sparse-keymap)))
6386 (suppress-keymap m)
6387 (define-key m "i" 'colorcomp-R-less)
6388 (define-key m "o" 'colorcomp-R-more)
6389 (define-key m "k" 'colorcomp-G-less)
6390 (define-key m "l" 'colorcomp-G-more)
6391 (define-key m "," 'colorcomp-B-less)
6392 (define-key m "." 'colorcomp-B-more)
6393 (define-key m " " 'colorcomp-copy-as-kill-and-exit)
6394 m))
6395 @end smallexample
6396
6397 Note that we never modify the data in each node, which is fixed when the
6398 ewoc is created to be either @code{nil} or an index into the vector
6399 @code{colorcomp-data}, the actual color components.
6400
6401 @node Blinking
6402 @section Blinking Parentheses
6403 @cindex parenthesis matching
6404 @cindex blinking parentheses
6405 @cindex balancing parentheses
6406
6407 This section describes the mechanism by which Emacs shows a matching
6408 open parenthesis when the user inserts a close parenthesis.
6409
6410 @defvar blink-paren-function
6411 The value of this variable should be a function (of no arguments) to
6412 be called whenever a character with close parenthesis syntax is inserted.
6413 The value of @code{blink-paren-function} may be @code{nil}, in which
6414 case nothing is done.
6415 @end defvar
6416
6417 @defopt blink-matching-paren
6418 If this variable is @code{nil}, then @code{blink-matching-open} does
6419 nothing.
6420 @end defopt
6421
6422 @defopt blink-matching-paren-distance
6423 This variable specifies the maximum distance to scan for a matching
6424 parenthesis before giving up.
6425 @end defopt
6426
6427 @defopt blink-matching-delay
6428 This variable specifies the number of seconds to keep indicating the
6429 matching parenthesis. A fraction of a second often gives good
6430 results, but the default is 1, which works on all systems.
6431 @end defopt
6432
6433 @deffn Command blink-matching-open
6434 This function is the default value of @code{blink-paren-function}. It
6435 assumes that point follows a character with close parenthesis syntax
6436 and applies the appropriate effect momentarily to the matching opening
6437 character. If that character is not already on the screen, it
6438 displays the character's context in the echo area. To avoid long
6439 delays, this function does not search farther than
6440 @code{blink-matching-paren-distance} characters.
6441
6442 Here is an example of calling this function explicitly.
6443
6444 @smallexample
6445 @group
6446 (defun interactive-blink-matching-open ()
6447 "Indicate momentarily the start of parenthesized sexp before point."
6448 (interactive)
6449 @end group
6450 @group
6451 (let ((blink-matching-paren-distance
6452 (buffer-size))
6453 (blink-matching-paren t))
6454 (blink-matching-open)))
6455 @end group
6456 @end smallexample
6457 @end deffn
6458
6459 @node Character Display
6460 @section Character Display
6461
6462 This section describes how characters are actually displayed by
6463 Emacs. Typically, a character is displayed as a @dfn{glyph} (a
6464 graphical symbol which occupies one character position on the screen),
6465 whose appearance corresponds to the character itself. For example,
6466 the character @samp{a} (character code 97) is displayed as @samp{a}.
6467 Some characters, however, are displayed specially. For example, the
6468 formfeed character (character code 12) is usually displayed as a
6469 sequence of two glyphs, @samp{^L}, while the newline character
6470 (character code 10) starts a new screen line.
6471
6472 You can modify how each character is displayed by defining a
6473 @dfn{display table}, which maps each character code into a sequence of
6474 glyphs. @xref{Display Tables}.
6475
6476 @menu
6477 * Usual Display:: The usual conventions for displaying characters.
6478 * Display Tables:: What a display table consists of.
6479 * Active Display Table:: How Emacs selects a display table to use.
6480 * Glyphs:: How to define a glyph, and what glyphs mean.
6481 * Glyphless Chars:: How glyphless characters are drawn.
6482 @end menu
6483
6484 @node Usual Display
6485 @subsection Usual Display Conventions
6486
6487 Here are the conventions for displaying each character code (in the
6488 absence of a display table, which can override these
6489 @iftex
6490 conventions).
6491 @end iftex
6492 @ifnottex
6493 conventions; @pxref{Display Tables}).
6494 @end ifnottex
6495
6496 @cindex printable ASCII characters
6497 @itemize @bullet
6498 @item
6499 The @dfn{printable @acronym{ASCII} characters}, character codes 32
6500 through 126 (consisting of numerals, English letters, and symbols like
6501 @samp{#}) are displayed literally.
6502
6503 @item
6504 The tab character (character code 9) displays as whitespace stretching
6505 up to the next tab stop column. @xref{Text Display,,, emacs, The GNU
6506 Emacs Manual}. The variable @code{tab-width} controls the number of
6507 spaces per tab stop (see below).
6508
6509 @item
6510 The newline character (character code 10) has a special effect: it
6511 ends the preceding line and starts a new line.
6512
6513 @cindex ASCII control characters
6514 @item
6515 The non-printable @dfn{@acronym{ASCII} control characters}---character
6516 codes 0 through 31, as well as the @key{DEL} character (character code
6517 127)---display in one of two ways according to the variable
6518 @code{ctl-arrow}. If this variable is non-@code{nil} (the default),
6519 these characters are displayed as sequences of two glyphs, where the
6520 first glyph is @samp{^} (a display table can specify a glyph to use
6521 instead of @samp{^}); e.g., the @key{DEL} character is displayed as
6522 @samp{^?}.
6523
6524 If @code{ctl-arrow} is @code{nil}, these characters are displayed as
6525 octal escapes (see below).
6526
6527 This rule also applies to carriage return (character code 13), if that
6528 character appears in the buffer. But carriage returns usually do not
6529 appear in buffer text; they are eliminated as part of end-of-line
6530 conversion (@pxref{Coding System Basics}).
6531
6532 @cindex octal escapes
6533 @item
6534 @dfn{Raw bytes} are non-@acronym{ASCII} characters with codes 128
6535 through 255 (@pxref{Text Representations}). These characters display
6536 as @dfn{octal escapes}: sequences of four glyphs, where the first
6537 glyph is the @acronym{ASCII} code for @samp{\}, and the others are
6538 digit characters representing the character code in octal. (A display
6539 table can specify a glyph to use instead of @samp{\}.)
6540
6541 @item
6542 Each non-@acronym{ASCII} character with code above 255 is displayed
6543 literally, if the terminal supports it. If the terminal does not
6544 support it, the character is said to be @dfn{glyphless}, and it is
6545 usually displayed using a placeholder glyph. For example, if a
6546 graphical terminal has no font for a character, Emacs usually displays
6547 a box containing the character code in hexadecimal. @xref{Glyphless
6548 Chars}.
6549 @end itemize
6550
6551 The above display conventions apply even when there is a display
6552 table, for any character whose entry in the active display table is
6553 @code{nil}. Thus, when you set up a display table, you need only
6554 specify the characters for which you want special behavior.
6555
6556 The following variables affect how certain characters are displayed
6557 on the screen. Since they change the number of columns the characters
6558 occupy, they also affect the indentation functions. They also affect
6559 how the mode line is displayed; if you want to force redisplay of the
6560 mode line using the new values, call the function
6561 @code{force-mode-line-update} (@pxref{Mode Line Format}).
6562
6563 @defopt ctl-arrow
6564 @cindex control characters in display
6565 This buffer-local variable controls how control characters are
6566 displayed. If it is non-@code{nil}, they are displayed as a caret
6567 followed by the character: @samp{^A}. If it is @code{nil}, they are
6568 displayed as octal escapes: a backslash followed by three octal
6569 digits, as in @samp{\001}.
6570 @end defopt
6571
6572 @defopt tab-width
6573 The value of this buffer-local variable is the spacing between tab
6574 stops used for displaying tab characters in Emacs buffers. The value
6575 is in units of columns, and the default is 8. Note that this feature
6576 is completely independent of the user-settable tab stops used by the
6577 command @code{tab-to-tab-stop}. @xref{Indent Tabs}.
6578 @end defopt
6579
6580 @node Display Tables
6581 @subsection Display Tables
6582
6583 @cindex display table
6584 A display table is a special-purpose char-table
6585 (@pxref{Char-Tables}), with @code{display-table} as its subtype, which
6586 is used to override the usual character display conventions. This
6587 section describes how to make, inspect, and assign elements to a
6588 display table object.
6589
6590 @defun make-display-table
6591 This creates and returns a display table. The table initially has
6592 @code{nil} in all elements.
6593 @end defun
6594
6595 The ordinary elements of the display table are indexed by character
6596 codes; the element at index @var{c} says how to display the character
6597 code @var{c}. The value should be @code{nil} (which means to display
6598 the character @var{c} according to the usual display conventions;
6599 @pxref{Usual Display}), or a vector of glyph codes (which means to
6600 display the character @var{c} as those glyphs; @pxref{Glyphs}).
6601
6602 @strong{Warning:} if you use the display table to change the display
6603 of newline characters, the whole buffer will be displayed as one long
6604 line.
6605
6606 The display table also has six @dfn{extra slots} which serve special
6607 purposes. Here is a table of their meanings; @code{nil} in any slot
6608 means to use the default for that slot, as stated below.
6609
6610 @table @asis
6611 @item 0
6612 The glyph for the end of a truncated screen line (the default for this
6613 is @samp{$}). @xref{Glyphs}. On graphical terminals, Emacs uses
6614 arrows in the fringes to indicate truncation, so the display table has
6615 no effect.
6616
6617 @item 1
6618 The glyph for the end of a continued line (the default is @samp{\}).
6619 On graphical terminals, Emacs uses curved arrows in the fringes to
6620 indicate continuation, so the display table has no effect.
6621
6622 @item 2
6623 The glyph for indicating a character displayed as an octal character
6624 code (the default is @samp{\}).
6625
6626 @item 3
6627 The glyph for indicating a control character (the default is @samp{^}).
6628
6629 @item 4
6630 A vector of glyphs for indicating the presence of invisible lines (the
6631 default is @samp{...}). @xref{Selective Display}.
6632
6633 @item 5
6634 The glyph used to draw the border between side-by-side windows (the
6635 default is @samp{|}). @xref{Splitting Windows}. This takes effect only
6636 when there are no scroll bars; if scroll bars are supported and in use,
6637 a scroll bar separates the two windows.
6638 @end table
6639
6640 For example, here is how to construct a display table that mimics
6641 the effect of setting @code{ctl-arrow} to a non-@code{nil} value
6642 (@pxref{Glyphs}, for the function @code{make-glyph-code}):
6643
6644 @example
6645 (setq disptab (make-display-table))
6646 (dotimes (i 32)
6647 (or (= i ?\t)
6648 (= i ?\n)
6649 (aset disptab i
6650 (vector (make-glyph-code ?^ 'escape-glyph)
6651 (make-glyph-code (+ i 64) 'escape-glyph)))))
6652 (aset disptab 127
6653 (vector (make-glyph-code ?^ 'escape-glyph)
6654 (make-glyph-code ?? 'escape-glyph)))))
6655 @end example
6656
6657 @defun display-table-slot display-table slot
6658 This function returns the value of the extra slot @var{slot} of
6659 @var{display-table}. The argument @var{slot} may be a number from 0 to
6660 5 inclusive, or a slot name (symbol). Valid symbols are
6661 @code{truncation}, @code{wrap}, @code{escape}, @code{control},
6662 @code{selective-display}, and @code{vertical-border}.
6663 @end defun
6664
6665 @defun set-display-table-slot display-table slot value
6666 This function stores @var{value} in the extra slot @var{slot} of
6667 @var{display-table}. The argument @var{slot} may be a number from 0 to
6668 5 inclusive, or a slot name (symbol). Valid symbols are
6669 @code{truncation}, @code{wrap}, @code{escape}, @code{control},
6670 @code{selective-display}, and @code{vertical-border}.
6671 @end defun
6672
6673 @defun describe-display-table display-table
6674 This function displays a description of the display table
6675 @var{display-table} in a help buffer.
6676 @end defun
6677
6678 @deffn Command describe-current-display-table
6679 This command displays a description of the current display table in a
6680 help buffer.
6681 @end deffn
6682
6683 @node Active Display Table
6684 @subsection Active Display Table
6685 @cindex active display table
6686
6687 Each window can specify a display table, and so can each buffer.
6688 The window's display table, if there is one, takes precedence over the
6689 buffer's display table. If neither exists, Emacs tries to use the
6690 standard display table; if that is @code{nil}, Emacs uses the usual
6691 character display conventions (@pxref{Usual Display}).
6692
6693 Note that display tables affect how the mode line is displayed, so
6694 if you want to force redisplay of the mode line using a new display
6695 table, call @code{force-mode-line-update} (@pxref{Mode Line Format}).
6696
6697 @defun window-display-table &optional window
6698 This function returns @var{window}'s display table, or @code{nil} if
6699 there is none. The default for @var{window} is the selected window.
6700 @end defun
6701
6702 @defun set-window-display-table window table
6703 This function sets the display table of @var{window} to @var{table}.
6704 The argument @var{table} should be either a display table or
6705 @code{nil}.
6706 @end defun
6707
6708 @defvar buffer-display-table
6709 This variable is automatically buffer-local in all buffers; its value
6710 specifies the buffer's display table. If it is @code{nil}, there is
6711 no buffer display table.
6712 @end defvar
6713
6714 @defvar standard-display-table
6715 The value of this variable is the standard display table, which is
6716 used when Emacs is displaying a buffer in a window with neither a
6717 window display table nor a buffer display table defined, or when Emacs
6718 is outputting text to the standard output or error streams. Although its
6719 default is typically @code{nil}, in an interactive session if the
6720 terminal cannot display curved quotes, its default maps curved quotes
6721 to ASCII approximations. @xref{Keys in Documentation}.
6722 @end defvar
6723
6724 The @file{disp-table} library defines several functions for changing
6725 the standard display table.
6726
6727 @node Glyphs
6728 @subsection Glyphs
6729 @cindex glyph
6730
6731 @cindex glyph code
6732 A @dfn{glyph} is a graphical symbol which occupies a single
6733 character position on the screen. Each glyph is represented in Lisp
6734 as a @dfn{glyph code}, which specifies a character and optionally a
6735 face to display it in (@pxref{Faces}). The main use of glyph codes is
6736 as the entries of display tables (@pxref{Display Tables}). The
6737 following functions are used to manipulate glyph codes:
6738
6739 @defun make-glyph-code char &optional face
6740 This function returns a glyph code representing char @var{char} with
6741 face @var{face}. If @var{face} is omitted or @code{nil}, the glyph
6742 uses the default face; in that case, the glyph code is an integer. If
6743 @var{face} is non-@code{nil}, the glyph code is not necessarily an
6744 integer object.
6745 @end defun
6746
6747 @defun glyph-char glyph
6748 This function returns the character of glyph code @var{glyph}.
6749 @end defun
6750
6751 @defun glyph-face glyph
6752 This function returns face of glyph code @var{glyph}, or @code{nil} if
6753 @var{glyph} uses the default face.
6754 @end defun
6755
6756 @ifnottex
6757 You can set up a @dfn{glyph table} to change how glyph codes are
6758 actually displayed on text terminals. This feature is semi-obsolete;
6759 use @code{glyphless-char-display} instead (@pxref{Glyphless Chars}).
6760
6761 @defvar glyph-table
6762 The value of this variable, if non-@code{nil}, is the current glyph
6763 table. It takes effect only on character terminals; on graphical
6764 displays, all glyphs are displayed literally. The glyph table should
6765 be a vector whose @var{g}th element specifies how to display glyph
6766 code @var{g}, where @var{g} is the glyph code for a glyph whose face
6767 is unspecified. Each element should be one of the following:
6768
6769 @table @asis
6770 @item @code{nil}
6771 Display this glyph literally.
6772
6773 @item a string
6774 Display this glyph by sending the specified string to the terminal.
6775
6776 @item a glyph code
6777 Display the specified glyph code instead.
6778 @end table
6779
6780 Any integer glyph code greater than or equal to the length of the
6781 glyph table is displayed literally.
6782 @end defvar
6783 @end ifnottex
6784
6785 @node Glyphless Chars
6786 @subsection Glyphless Character Display
6787 @cindex glyphless characters
6788
6789 @dfn{Glyphless characters} are characters which are displayed in a
6790 special way, e.g., as a box containing a hexadecimal code, instead of
6791 being displayed literally. These include characters which are
6792 explicitly defined to be glyphless, as well as characters for which
6793 there is no available font (on a graphical display), and characters
6794 which cannot be encoded by the terminal's coding system (on a text
6795 terminal).
6796
6797 @defvar glyphless-char-display
6798 The value of this variable is a char-table which defines glyphless
6799 characters and how they are displayed. Each entry must be one of the
6800 following display methods:
6801
6802 @table @asis
6803 @item @code{nil}
6804 Display the character in the usual way.
6805
6806 @item @code{zero-width}
6807 Don't display the character.
6808
6809 @item @code{thin-space}
6810 Display a thin space, 1-pixel wide on graphical displays, or
6811 1-character wide on text terminals.
6812
6813 @item @code{empty-box}
6814 Display an empty box.
6815
6816 @item @code{hex-code}
6817 Display a box containing the Unicode codepoint of the character, in
6818 hexadecimal notation.
6819
6820 @item an @acronym{ASCII} string
6821 Display a box containing that string. The string should contain at
6822 most 6 @acronym{ASCII} characters.
6823
6824 @item a cons cell @code{(@var{graphical} . @var{text})}
6825 Display with @var{graphical} on graphical displays, and with
6826 @var{text} on text terminals. Both @var{graphical} and @var{text}
6827 must be one of the display methods described above.
6828 @end table
6829
6830 @noindent
6831 The @code{thin-space}, @code{empty-box}, @code{hex-code}, and
6832 @acronym{ASCII} string display methods are drawn with the
6833 @code{glyphless-char} face. On text terminals, a box is emulated by
6834 square brackets, @samp{[]}.
6835
6836 The char-table has one extra slot, which determines how to display any
6837 character that cannot be displayed with any available font, or cannot
6838 be encoded by the terminal's coding system. Its value should be one
6839 of the above display methods, except @code{zero-width} or a cons cell.
6840
6841 If a character has a non-@code{nil} entry in an active display table,
6842 the display table takes effect; in this case, Emacs does not consult
6843 @code{glyphless-char-display} at all.
6844 @end defvar
6845
6846 @defopt glyphless-char-display-control
6847 This user option provides a convenient way to set
6848 @code{glyphless-char-display} for groups of similar characters. Do
6849 not set its value directly from Lisp code; the value takes effect only
6850 via a custom @code{:set} function (@pxref{Variable Definitions}),
6851 which updates @code{glyphless-char-display}.
6852
6853 Its value should be an alist of elements @code{(@var{group}
6854 . @var{method})}, where @var{group} is a symbol specifying a group of
6855 characters, and @var{method} is a symbol specifying how to display
6856 them.
6857
6858 @var{group} should be one of the following:
6859
6860 @table @code
6861 @item c0-control
6862 @acronym{ASCII} control characters @code{U+0000} to @code{U+001F},
6863 excluding the newline and tab characters (normally displayed as escape
6864 sequences like @samp{^A}; @pxref{Text Display,, How Text Is Displayed,
6865 emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}).
6866
6867 @item c1-control
6868 Non-@acronym{ASCII}, non-printing characters @code{U+0080} to
6869 @code{U+009F} (normally displayed as octal escape sequences like
6870 @samp{\230}).
6871
6872 @item format-control
6873 Characters of Unicode General Category [Cf], such as @samp{U+200E}
6874 (Left-to-Right Mark), but excluding characters that have graphic
6875 images, such as @samp{U+00AD} (Soft Hyphen).
6876
6877 @item no-font
6878 Characters for there is no suitable font, or which cannot be encoded
6879 by the terminal's coding system.
6880 @end table
6881
6882 @c FIXME: this can also be 'acronym', but that's not currently
6883 @c completely implemented; it applies only to the format-control
6884 @c group, and only works if the acronym is in 'char-acronym-table'.
6885 The @var{method} symbol should be one of @code{zero-width},
6886 @code{thin-space}, @code{empty-box}, or @code{hex-code}. These have
6887 the same meanings as in @code{glyphless-char-display}, above.
6888 @end defopt
6889
6890 @node Beeping
6891 @section Beeping
6892 @cindex bell
6893
6894 This section describes how to make Emacs ring the bell (or blink the
6895 screen) to attract the user's attention. Be conservative about how
6896 often you do this; frequent bells can become irritating. Also be
6897 careful not to use just beeping when signaling an error is more
6898 appropriate (@pxref{Errors}).
6899
6900 @defun ding &optional do-not-terminate
6901 @cindex keyboard macro termination
6902 This function beeps, or flashes the screen (see @code{visible-bell} below).
6903 It also terminates any keyboard macro currently executing unless
6904 @var{do-not-terminate} is non-@code{nil}.
6905 @end defun
6906
6907 @defun beep &optional do-not-terminate
6908 This is a synonym for @code{ding}.
6909 @end defun
6910
6911 @defopt visible-bell
6912 This variable determines whether Emacs should flash the screen to
6913 represent a bell. Non-@code{nil} means yes, @code{nil} means no.
6914 This is effective on graphical displays, and on text terminals
6915 provided the terminal's Termcap entry defines the visible bell
6916 capability (@samp{vb}).
6917 @end defopt
6918
6919 @defopt ring-bell-function
6920 If this is non-@code{nil}, it specifies how Emacs should ring the
6921 bell. Its value should be a function of no arguments. If this is
6922 non-@code{nil}, it takes precedence over the @code{visible-bell}
6923 variable.
6924 @end defopt
6925
6926 @node Window Systems
6927 @section Window Systems
6928
6929 Emacs works with several window systems, most notably the X Window
6930 System. Both Emacs and X use the term ``window'', but use it
6931 differently. An Emacs frame is a single window as far as X is
6932 concerned; the individual Emacs windows are not known to X at all.
6933
6934 @defvar window-system
6935 This terminal-local variable tells Lisp programs what window system
6936 Emacs is using for displaying the frame. The possible values are
6937
6938 @table @code
6939 @item x
6940 @cindex X Window System
6941 Emacs is displaying the frame using X.
6942 @item w32
6943 Emacs is displaying the frame using native MS-Windows GUI.
6944 @item ns
6945 Emacs is displaying the frame using the Nextstep interface (used on
6946 GNUstep and Mac OS X).
6947 @item pc
6948 Emacs is displaying the frame using MS-DOS direct screen writes.
6949 @item nil
6950 Emacs is displaying the frame on a character-based terminal.
6951 @end table
6952 @end defvar
6953
6954 @defvar initial-window-system
6955 This variable holds the value of @code{window-system} used for the
6956 first frame created by Emacs during startup. (When Emacs is invoked
6957 with the @option{--daemon} option, it does not create any initial
6958 frames, so @code{initial-window-system} is @code{nil}, except on
6959 MS-Windows, where it is still @code{w32}. @xref{Initial Options,
6960 daemon,, emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}.)
6961 @end defvar
6962
6963 @defun window-system &optional frame
6964 This function returns a symbol whose name tells what window system is
6965 used for displaying @var{frame} (which defaults to the currently
6966 selected frame). The list of possible symbols it returns is the same
6967 one documented for the variable @code{window-system} above.
6968 @end defun
6969
6970 Do @emph{not} use @code{window-system} and
6971 @code{initial-window-system} as predicates or boolean flag variables,
6972 if you want to write code that works differently on text terminals and
6973 graphic displays. That is because @code{window-system} is not a good
6974 indicator of Emacs capabilities on a given display type. Instead, use
6975 @code{display-graphic-p} or any of the other @code{display-*-p}
6976 predicates described in @ref{Display Feature Testing}.
6977
6978 @node Tooltips
6979 @section Tooltips
6980 @cindex tooltips
6981 @dfn{Tooltips} are special frames (@pxref{Frames}) that are used to
6982 display helpful hints (a.k.a.@: ``tips'') related to the current
6983 position of the mouse pointer. Emacs uses tooltips to display help
6984 strings about active portions of text (@pxref{Special Properties}) and
6985 about various UI elements, such as menu items (@pxref{Extended Menu
6986 Items}) and tool-bar buttons (@pxref{Tool Bar}).
6987
6988 @defun tooltip-mode
6989 Tooltip Mode is a minor mode that enables display of tooltips.
6990 Turning off this mode causes the tooltips be displayed in the echo
6991 area. On text-mode (a.k.a.@: ``TTY'') frames, tooltips are always
6992 displayed in the echo area.
6993 @end defun
6994
6995 @vindex x-gtk-use-system-tooltips
6996 When Emacs is built with GTK+ support, it by default displays tooltips
6997 using GTK+ functions, and the appearance of the tooltips is then
6998 controlled by GTK+ settings. GTK+ tooltips can be disabled by
6999 changing the value of the variable @code{x-gtk-use-system-tooltips} to
7000 @code{nil}. The rest of this subsection describes how to control
7001 non-GTK+ tooltips, which are presented by Emacs itself.
7002
7003 Since tooltips are special frames, they have their frame parameters
7004 (@pxref{Frame Parameters}). Unlike other frames, the frame parameters
7005 for tooltips are stored in a special variable.
7006
7007 @defvar tooltip-frame-parameters
7008 This customizable option holds the frame parameters used for
7009 displaying tooltips. Any font and color parameters are ignored, and
7010 the corresponding attributes of the @code{tooltip} face are used
7011 instead. If @code{left} or @code{top} parameters are included, they
7012 are used as absolute frame-relative coordinates where the tooltip
7013 should be shown. (Mouse-relative position of the tooltip can be
7014 customized using the variables described in @ref{Tooltips,,, emacs,
7015 The GNU Emacs Manual}.) Note that the @code{left} and @code{top}
7016 parameters, if present, override the values of mouse-relative offsets.
7017 @end defvar
7018
7019 @vindex tooltip@r{ face}
7020 The @code{tooltip} face determines the appearance of text shown in
7021 tooltips. It should generally use a variable-pitch font of size that
7022 is preferably smaller than the default frame font.
7023
7024 @findex tooltip-help-tips
7025 @defvar tooltip-functions
7026 This abnormal hook is a list of functions to call when Emacs needs to
7027 display a tooltip. Each function is called with a single argument
7028 @var{event} which is a copy of the last mouse movement event. If a
7029 function on this list actually displays the tooltip, it should return
7030 non-@code{nil}, and then the rest of the functions will not be
7031 called. The default value of this variable is a single function
7032 @code{tooltip-help-tips}.
7033 @end defvar
7034
7035 If you write your own function to be put on the
7036 @code{tooltip-functions} list, you may need to know the buffer of the
7037 mouse event that triggered the tooltip display. The following
7038 function provides that information.
7039
7040 @defun tooltip-event-buffer event
7041 This function returns the buffer over which @var{event} occurred.
7042 Call it with the argument of the function from
7043 @code{tooltip-functions} to obtain the buffer whose text triggered the
7044 tooltip. Note that the event might occur not over a buffer (e.g.,
7045 over the tool bar), in which case this function will return
7046 @code{nil}.
7047 @end defun
7048
7049 Other aspects of tooltip display are controlled by several
7050 customizable settings; see @ref{Tooltips,,, emacs, The GNU Emacs
7051 Manual}.
7052
7053 @node Bidirectional Display
7054 @section Bidirectional Display
7055 @cindex bidirectional display
7056 @cindex right-to-left text
7057
7058 Emacs can display text written in scripts, such as Arabic, Farsi,
7059 and Hebrew, whose natural ordering for horizontal text display runs
7060 from right to left. Furthermore, segments of Latin script and digits
7061 embedded in right-to-left text are displayed left-to-right, while
7062 segments of right-to-left script embedded in left-to-right text
7063 (e.g., Arabic or Hebrew text in comments or strings in a program
7064 source file) are appropriately displayed right-to-left. We call such
7065 mixtures of left-to-right and right-to-left text @dfn{bidirectional
7066 text}. This section describes the facilities and options for editing
7067 and displaying bidirectional text.
7068
7069 @cindex logical order
7070 @cindex reading order
7071 @cindex visual order
7072 @cindex unicode bidirectional algorithm
7073 @cindex UBA
7074 @cindex bidirectional reordering
7075 @cindex reordering, of bidirectional text
7076 Text is stored in Emacs buffers and strings in @dfn{logical} (or
7077 @dfn{reading}) order, i.e., the order in which a human would read
7078 each character. In right-to-left and bidirectional text, the order in
7079 which characters are displayed on the screen (called @dfn{visual
7080 order}) is not the same as logical order; the characters' screen
7081 positions do not increase monotonically with string or buffer
7082 position. In performing this @dfn{bidirectional reordering}, Emacs
7083 follows the Unicode Bidirectional Algorithm (a.k.a.@: @acronym{UBA}),
7084 which is described in Annex #9 of the Unicode standard
7085 (@url{http://www.unicode.org/reports/tr9/}). Emacs provides a ``Full
7086 Bidirectionality'' class implementation of the @acronym{UBA},
7087 consistent with the requirements of the Unicode Standard v8.0.
7088
7089 @defvar bidi-display-reordering
7090 If the value of this buffer-local variable is non-@code{nil} (the
7091 default), Emacs performs bidirectional reordering for display. The
7092 reordering affects buffer text, as well as display strings and overlay
7093 strings from text and overlay properties in the buffer (@pxref{Overlay
7094 Properties}, and @pxref{Display Property}). If the value is
7095 @code{nil}, Emacs does not perform bidirectional reordering in the
7096 buffer.
7097
7098 The default value of @code{bidi-display-reordering} controls the
7099 reordering of strings which are not directly supplied by a buffer,
7100 including the text displayed in mode lines (@pxref{Mode Line Format})
7101 and header lines (@pxref{Header Lines}).
7102 @end defvar
7103
7104 @cindex unibyte buffers, and bidi reordering
7105 Emacs never reorders the text of a unibyte buffer, even if
7106 @code{bidi-display-reordering} is non-@code{nil} in the buffer. This
7107 is because unibyte buffers contain raw bytes, not characters, and thus
7108 lack the directionality properties required for reordering.
7109 Therefore, to test whether text in a buffer will be reordered for
7110 display, it is not enough to test the value of
7111 @code{bidi-display-reordering} alone. The correct test is this:
7112
7113 @example
7114 (if (and enable-multibyte-characters
7115 bidi-display-reordering)
7116 ;; Buffer is being reordered for display
7117 )
7118 @end example
7119
7120 However, unibyte display and overlay strings @emph{are} reordered if
7121 their parent buffer is reordered. This is because plain-@sc{ascii}
7122 strings are stored by Emacs as unibyte strings. If a unibyte display
7123 or overlay string includes non-@sc{ascii} characters, these characters
7124 are assumed to have left-to-right direction.
7125
7126 @cindex display properties, and bidi reordering of text
7127 Text covered by @code{display} text properties, by overlays with
7128 @code{display} properties whose value is a string, and by any other
7129 properties that replace buffer text, is treated as a single unit when
7130 it is reordered for display. That is, the entire chunk of text
7131 covered by these properties is reordered together. Moreover, the
7132 bidirectional properties of the characters in such a chunk of text are
7133 ignored, and Emacs reorders them as if they were replaced with a
7134 single character @code{U+FFFC}, known as the @dfn{Object Replacement
7135 Character}. This means that placing a display property over a portion
7136 of text may change the way that the surrounding text is reordered for
7137 display. To prevent this unexpected effect, always place such
7138 properties on text whose directionality is identical with text that
7139 surrounds it.
7140
7141 @cindex base direction of a paragraph
7142 Each paragraph of bidirectional text has a @dfn{base direction},
7143 either right-to-left or left-to-right. Left-to-right paragraphs are
7144 displayed beginning at the left margin of the window, and are
7145 truncated or continued when the text reaches the right margin.
7146 Right-to-left paragraphs are displayed beginning at the right margin,
7147 and are continued or truncated at the left margin.
7148
7149 By default, Emacs determines the base direction of each paragraph by
7150 looking at the text at its beginning. The precise method of
7151 determining the base direction is specified by the @acronym{UBA}; in a
7152 nutshell, the first character in a paragraph that has an explicit
7153 directionality determines the base direction of the paragraph.
7154 However, sometimes a buffer may need to force a certain base direction
7155 for its paragraphs. For example, buffers containing program source
7156 code should force all paragraphs to be displayed left-to-right. You
7157 can use following variable to do this:
7158
7159 @defvar bidi-paragraph-direction
7160 If the value of this buffer-local variable is the symbol
7161 @code{right-to-left} or @code{left-to-right}, all paragraphs in the
7162 buffer are assumed to have that specified direction. Any other value
7163 is equivalent to @code{nil} (the default), which means to determine
7164 the base direction of each paragraph from its contents.
7165
7166 @cindex @code{prog-mode}, and @code{bidi-paragraph-direction}
7167 Modes for program source code should set this to @code{left-to-right}.
7168 Prog mode does this by default, so modes derived from Prog mode do not
7169 need to set this explicitly (@pxref{Basic Major Modes}).
7170 @end defvar
7171
7172 @defun current-bidi-paragraph-direction &optional buffer
7173 This function returns the paragraph direction at point in the named
7174 @var{buffer}. The returned value is a symbol, either
7175 @code{left-to-right} or @code{right-to-left}. If @var{buffer} is
7176 omitted or @code{nil}, it defaults to the current buffer. If the
7177 buffer-local value of the variable @code{bidi-paragraph-direction} is
7178 non-@code{nil}, the returned value will be identical to that value;
7179 otherwise, the returned value reflects the paragraph direction
7180 determined dynamically by Emacs. For buffers whose value of
7181 @code{bidi-display-reordering} is @code{nil} as well as unibyte
7182 buffers, this function always returns @code{left-to-right}.
7183 @end defun
7184
7185 @cindex visual-order cursor motion
7186 Sometimes there's a need to move point in strict visual order,
7187 either to the left or to the right of its current screen position.
7188 Emacs provides a primitive to do that.
7189
7190 @defun move-point-visually direction
7191 This function moves point of the currently selected window to the
7192 buffer position that appears immediately to the right or to the left
7193 of point on the screen. If @var{direction} is positive, point will
7194 move one screen position to the right, otherwise it will move one
7195 screen position to the left. Note that, depending on the surrounding
7196 bidirectional context, this could potentially move point many buffer
7197 positions away. If invoked at the end of a screen line, the function
7198 moves point to the rightmost or leftmost screen position of the next
7199 or previous screen line, as appropriate for the value of
7200 @var{direction}.
7201
7202 The function returns the new buffer position as its value.
7203 @end defun
7204
7205 @cindex layout on display, and bidirectional text
7206 @cindex jumbled display of bidirectional text
7207 @cindex concatenating bidirectional strings
7208 Bidirectional reordering can have surprising and unpleasant effects
7209 when two strings with bidirectional content are juxtaposed in a
7210 buffer, or otherwise programmatically concatenated into a string of
7211 text. A typical problematic case is when a buffer consists of
7212 sequences of text fields separated by whitespace or punctuation
7213 characters, like Buffer Menu mode or Rmail Summary Mode. Because the
7214 punctuation characters used as separators have @dfn{weak
7215 directionality}, they take on the directionality of surrounding text.
7216 As result, a numeric field that follows a field with bidirectional
7217 content can be displayed @emph{to the left} of the preceding field,
7218 messing up the expected layout. There are several ways to avoid this
7219 problem:
7220
7221 @itemize @minus
7222 @item
7223 Append the special character @code{U+200E}, LEFT-TO-RIGHT MARK, or
7224 @acronym{LRM}, to the end of each field that may have bidirectional
7225 content, or prepend it to the beginning of the following field. The
7226 function @code{bidi-string-mark-left-to-right}, described below, comes
7227 in handy for this purpose. (In a right-to-left paragraph, use
7228 @code{U+200F}, RIGHT-TO-LEFT MARK, or @acronym{RLM}, instead.) This
7229 is one of the solutions recommended by the UBA.
7230
7231 @item
7232 Include the tab character in the field separator. The tab character
7233 plays the role of @dfn{segment separator} in bidirectional reordering,
7234 causing the text on either side to be reordered separately.
7235
7236 @cindex @code{space} display spec, and bidirectional text
7237 @item
7238 Separate fields with a @code{display} property or overlay with a
7239 property value of the form @code{(space . PROPS)} (@pxref{Specified
7240 Space}). Emacs treats this display specification as a @dfn{paragraph
7241 separator}, and reorders the text on either side separately.
7242 @end itemize
7243
7244 @defun bidi-string-mark-left-to-right string
7245 This function returns its argument @var{string}, possibly modified,
7246 such that the result can be safely concatenated with another string,
7247 or juxtaposed with another string in a buffer, without disrupting the
7248 relative layout of this string and the next one on display. If the
7249 string returned by this function is displayed as part of a
7250 left-to-right paragraph, it will always appear on display to the left
7251 of the text that follows it. The function works by examining the
7252 characters of its argument, and if any of those characters could cause
7253 reordering on display, the function appends the @acronym{LRM}
7254 character to the string. The appended @acronym{LRM} character is made
7255 invisible by giving it an @code{invisible} text property of @code{t}
7256 (@pxref{Invisible Text}).
7257 @end defun
7258
7259 The reordering algorithm uses the bidirectional properties of the
7260 characters stored as their @code{bidi-class} property
7261 (@pxref{Character Properties}). Lisp programs can change these
7262 properties by calling the @code{put-char-code-property} function.
7263 However, doing this requires a thorough understanding of the
7264 @acronym{UBA}, and is therefore not recommended. Any changes to the
7265 bidirectional properties of a character have global effect: they
7266 affect all Emacs frames and windows.
7267
7268 Similarly, the @code{mirroring} property is used to display the
7269 appropriate mirrored character in the reordered text. Lisp programs
7270 can affect the mirrored display by changing this property. Again, any
7271 such changes affect all of Emacs display.
7272
7273 @cindex overriding bidirectional properties
7274 @cindex directional overrides
7275 @cindex LRO
7276 @cindex RLO
7277 The bidirectional properties of characters can be overridden by
7278 inserting into the text special directional control characters,
7279 LEFT-TO-RIGHT OVERRIDE (@acronym{LRO}) and RIGHT-TO-LEFT OVERRIDE
7280 (@acronym{RLO}). Any characters between a @acronym{RLO} and the
7281 following newline or POP DIRECTIONAL FORMATTING (@acronym{PDF})
7282 control character, whichever comes first, will be displayed as if they
7283 were strong right-to-left characters, i.e.@: they will be reversed on
7284 display. Similarly, any characters between @acronym{LRO} and
7285 @acronym{PDF} or newline will display as if they were strong
7286 left-to-right, and will @emph{not} be reversed even if they are strong
7287 right-to-left characters.
7288
7289 @cindex phishing using directional overrides
7290 @cindex malicious use of directional overrides
7291 These overrides are useful when you want to make some text
7292 unaffected by the reordering algorithm, and instead directly control
7293 the display order. But they can also be used for malicious purposes,
7294 known as @dfn{phishing}. Specifically, a URL on a Web page or a link
7295 in an email message can be manipulated to make its visual appearance
7296 unrecognizable, or similar to some popular benign location, while the
7297 real location, interpreted by a browser in the logical order, is very
7298 different.
7299
7300 Emacs provides a primitive that applications can use to detect
7301 instances of text whose bidirectional properties were overridden so as
7302 to make a left-to-right character display as if it were a
7303 right-to-left character, or vise versa.
7304
7305 @defun bidi-find-overridden-directionality from to &optional object
7306 This function looks at the text of the specified @var{object} between
7307 positions @var{from} (inclusive) and @var{to} (exclusive), and returns
7308 the first position where it finds a strong left-to-right character
7309 whose directional properties were forced to display the character as
7310 right-to-left, or for a strong right-to-left character that was forced
7311 to display as left-to-right. If it finds no such characters in the
7312 specified region of text, it returns @code{nil}.
7313
7314 The optional argument @var{object} specifies which text to search, and
7315 defaults to the current buffer. If @var{object} is non-@code{nil}, it
7316 can be some other buffer, or it can be a string or a window. If it is
7317 a string, the function searches that string. If it is a window, the
7318 function searches the buffer displayed in that window. If a buffer
7319 whose text you want to examine is displayed in some window, we
7320 recommend to specify it by that window, rather than pass the buffer to
7321 the function. This is because telling the function about the window
7322 allows it to correctly account for window-specific overlays, which
7323 might change the result of the function if some text in the buffer is
7324 covered by overlays.
7325 @end defun
7326
7327 @cindex copying bidirectional text, preserve visual order
7328 @cindex visual order, preserve when copying bidirectional text
7329 When text that includes mixed right-to-left and left-to-right
7330 characters and bidirectional controls is copied into a different
7331 location, it can change its visual appearance, and also can affect the
7332 visual appearance of the surrounding text at destination. This is
7333 because reordering of bidirectional text specified by the
7334 @acronym{UBA} has non-trivial context-dependent effects both on the
7335 copied text and on the text at copy destination that will surround it.
7336
7337 Sometimes, a Lisp program may need to preserve the exact visual
7338 appearance of the copied text at destination, and of the text that
7339 surrounds the copy. Lisp programs can use the following function to
7340 achieve that effect.
7341
7342 @defun buffer-substring-with-bidi-context start end &optional no-properties
7343 This function works similar to @code{buffer-substring} (@pxref{Buffer
7344 Contents}), but it prepends and appends to the copied text bidi
7345 directional control characters necessary to preserve the visual
7346 appearance of the text when it is inserted at another place. Optional
7347 argument @var{no-properties}, if non-@code{nil}, means remove the text
7348 properties from the copy of the text.
7349 @end defun